Saab 2007 9 5 Owners Manual 95_US_M07

Saab-Saab-9-5-2007-Users-Manual-388171 saab-saab-9-5-2007-users-manual-388171

2007 to the manual 3f1e7f0c-e05c-4f58-8ab8-c8b0a13aa1e6

2015-09-07

: Saab Saab-2007-9-5-Owners-Manual-762927 saab-2007-9-5-owners-manual-762927 saab pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 288

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

95_U S_M 07.book Page 1 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Owner’s Manual
Saab 9-5, Model Year 2007
Safety
Security
Instruments and controls
Saab 9-5 Audio System 3
Interior equipment and trunk
Starting and driving
Car care and technical information
Customer Assistance and Information
Specifications
Index

Service Readiness, Saab Automobile AB, Trollhättan, Sweden
Printed in Sweden

11
43
57
90
113
139
189
251
257
271

95_U S_M 07.book Page 2 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Introduction
This manual provides practical guidance on
driving and caring for your Saab.
Although this manual describes the most
important differences between model variants, it does not include precise specifications of the different variants. Some differences also occur to meet special legal
requirements in different countries.
Importation and distribution of Saab automobiles, spare parts and accessories are
handled exclusively by General Motors of
Canada Limited in Canada and by Saab
Cars USA, Inc. in the U.S.A.

We recommend that you read through the
manual before taking the car out for the first
time and that you keep it in the car for future
reference.
To find a specific item, use the overviews
given on pages 3–6. A list of contents is
given at the beginning of each section of the
manual, and there is also a comprehensive
index at the back of the book.
Supplied with the car is a Warranty and Service Record booklet and a tire warranty
folder which specifies the regular maintenance to be carried out. The book also contains important warranty conditions.

WARNING
WARNING texts warn against the danger
of injury if the specified instructions are
not followed.

NOTICE
NOTICE texts warn of potential damage
to the car if the recommendations are not
followed.

Since the policy at Saab is one of continual
improvement, we retain the right to incorporate modifications and to alter specifications
during production without prior notice.
3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all
cars (can depend on model variant, engine
variant, market specification, options or
accessories).
If you have any questions concerning your
car, its equipment, the warranty conditions
or the like, your Saab dealer will be pleased
to help.
Best wishes,
Saab Automobile AB
Saab Automobile AB does not accept liability for
any damage caused by the fitting of spare parts,
exchange parts or accessories that are not
approved by Saab Automobile AB.
The specifications, design particulars and illustrations included in the manual are not binding.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 3 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Instrument panel

Indicator and warning lights ______
Speedometer _________________
Odometer and trip meter ________
Fuel gauge___________________
Temperature gauge ____________
Saab Information Display (SID) ___

Turn signal and lane change
indicators ______________ 75
High beam flasher ________ 73
Cruise control 3 _________ 159

58
65
64
65
65
68

Wipers and washers______
77
Rear-window wiper
(SportCombi) 3_________
78
Rain sensing wipers 3 ____
77
Washers _______________ 203
Wipers and washers______ 202

Parking lights____________ 73
High/low beam __________ 73
Daytime running lights_____ 73
Instrument illumination ____ 75
Changing bulbs __________ 204
Rear fog light____________ 74
NIGHT PANEL __________ 72

Saab 9-5 Audio System 3 _
Steering wheel controls 3 _

90
91

Automatic climate control
(ACC) ________________
79
Air conditioning (ACC) ____ 243
76
72
IB3830

Front fog lights 3 _________
NIGHT PANEL __________

Hazard warning lights_____

Steering wheel controls 3 _______
Sentronic, manual mode 3 3 ____

91
156

Heated front seats 3 ___________
Head restraint ________________

87
21

Power Outlet 3________________

126

95_U S_M 07.book Page 4 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Exterior
Moonroof 3 _____________
Washing the car _________
Waxing and polishing _____
Touching up the paint _____
Anti-corrosion treatment ___

Driving with a roof rack load______
Fitting the roof carriers 3 ________
Maximum roof load ____________
Rearview mirror _______________

123
241
242
242
245

179
179
258
118

Hood _______________________
Engine compartment: washing ___

Headlights _____________
73
High/low beam __________
73
Turn signal and lane change
indicators______________
75
Headlight washers 3 _____
77
Changing bulbs _________ 204

Headlights ______________ 73
Rear light cluster, 9-5 Sedan 208
Rear lights clusters,
9-5 SportCombi _________ 210
Changing bulbs __________ 204

Central locking __________
Trunk lid lock, 9-5 Sedan __
Tailgate, 9-5 SportCombi __
Child safety locks ________
Car alarm 3 ____________

44
47
48
47
50

Tires pressure ________________
Wheels and tires ______________
Braking______________________
Driving in cold weather__________
Compact spare tire_____________
Changing a wheel _____________

267
266
160
172
234
236

IB3831

Towing a trailer 3 ________ 174
Towing the car ___________ 183
Rear towing eye _________ 184

Trunk _______________________
Folding the rear seat, 9-5 Sedan __
Folding the rear seat,
9-5 SportCombi ______________
Trunk Release Handle __________
Driving with a spare wheel fitted __
Compact spare tire ____________

190
242

129
129
132
138
183
234

Fuel gauge___________________
Refueling ____________________
Economical motoring ___________
Fuel ________________________

65
146
170
260

95_U S_M 07.book Page 5 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Interior

Interior lighting ________________
Moonroof 3 __________________
Dome light, front ______________

124
123
214

Rearview mirrors ______________
Door mirrors__________________
Sun visors ___________________

Steering wheel adjustment _ 114
Airbag _________________ 29
Power steering fluid_______ 198
Steering wheel controls 3 __ 91
Sentronic, manual mode 3 3 156

116
116
125

Safety belts ____________
12
Airbag_________________
29
Child safety ____________
22
Child safety locks ________
47
Safety belts, maintenance _ 239

Seats__________________ 18
Heated front seats 3 ______ 87
Head restraint 3 _________ 21
Safety belts _____________ 12
Child safety _____________ 22
Folding the rear seat,
9-5 Sedan _____________ 129
Folding the rear seat,
9-5 SportCombi _________ 132
Upholstery and trim_______ 240
Side airbags ____________ 36

Glove compartment ______ 126

IB3832

Manual transmission _____ 150
Automatic transmission 3 _ 151

Electric windows ______________
Ignition switch ________________
Starting the engine ____________
Engine Break-In Period _________
Driving in hot weather __________
Driving in cold weather _________
Parking _____________________

115
140
141
150
173
172
165

95_U S_M 07.book Page 6 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Engine compartment
Warning labels __________
V.I.N. number ___________
Engine number __________
Gearbox number _________
Color code______________
Tire and Loading Information
Label _________________

Engine ______________________
Checking the oil level ___________
Engine oil, specification _________

194
194
261

7
268
268
268
268

Braking______________________
ABS brakes __________________
Brake and clutch fluid___________
Brake system _________________
Brake pads___________________

160
161
196
265
265

Fuses _________________
Changing a fuse _________
Relays ________________
Table of fuses ___________

216
218
220
216

Temperature gauge ______
Driving in hot weather_____
Driving in cold weather ____
Coolant _______________
Coolant capacity_________

65
173
172
195
260

231

Power steering fluid_______ 198
Steering, technical data ___ 265

140
201
263
145

IB3636

Ignition switch ___________
Drive belts ______________
Spark plugs _____________
Catalytic converter _______

Wipers and washers______
77
Washers _______________ 203
Washer jets ____________ 203

Important considerations for driving
Turbo unit ___________________
Engine, technical data __________

144
191
260

Manual transmission ___________
Automatic transmission 3 _______
Automatic transmission,
technical data ________________
Manual gearbox, technical data ___

150
151
264
264

Jump starting _________________
Battery ______________________
Charging/replacing the battery____

186
199
200

95_U S_M 07.book Page 7 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Warning labels

A/C system
Refrigerant at high pressure.
Do not loosen or remove the A/C system fittings before
discharging the A/C system. Improper service methods
may cause personal injury. System to be serviced by
authorized personnel only. For instructions consult
workshop manual.
The A/C system complies with SAE J639.
Charge: 825 g of R134a.
Compressor oil: PAG oil SP-10 alt.
Saab oil 4759106
Oil amount: See workshop manual.

Radiator fan
Radiator fan may start at
any time.

IB336

Brake fluid
CLEAN FILLER CAP BEFORE
REMOVING. USE ONLY DOT 4
FLUID FROM SEALED CONTAINER.

LEVEL INDICATOR
DARK
CLEAR

OK
LOW

Maintenance Free
12V 60Ah 580A (EN)

Coolant:
Never open when engine hot!

000 A-12102-EP

P/N 127 93 955

Battery
• No sparks, flames or smoking.
• Shield eyes, explosive gases can cause blindness or injury.
• Sulphuric acid can cause blindness or severe burns.
• Flush eyes immediately with water. Get medical help fast.
• Do not tip battery. Do not open battery.
KEEP OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN

• AVOID SPARKS AND OPEN FLAMES,
NO SMOKING
• WEAR EYE PROTECTION
• KEEP OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN
• ACID
• SEE OWNER’S MANUAL
• FLAMMABLE GAS

95_U S_M 07.book Page 8 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Contact a Saab dealer if a
xenon headlight requires
replacement.
This label is only found on
cars with xenon headlights.

WARNING
EVEN WITH ADVANCED AIR BAGS
• Children can be killed or seriously
injured by the air bag.
• The back seat is the safest place for
children.
• Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front.
• Always use seat belts and child
restraints.

IB336

Jack
Use only on specified vehicles. Safe working load 1100
kg. Use on level firm ground only. Do not get under a
vehicle that is supported only by a jack, use vehicle support stands.
For more information see your owner´s manual.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 9 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

9
Examples of symbols that can be found in your car
No sparks, flames or smoking.

Buckle up

Headlights

Windshield
wipers

Coolant
temperature

Radiator fan

Use protective
goggles

Airbag

Direction
indicators

Windshield
washers

Battery
charging

Fuel

Keep out of
reach of
children.

Never place a
rear-facing
child seat in
this seat.

Parking lights

Defroster

Foot brake

Battery acid
contains
sulfuric acid.

Electric
windows

Hazard
warning lights

Rear window
heating

Coolant level

Refer to the
Owner’s
Manual.

Deactivating
of rear window
switches

Front fog
lights

Ventilation fan

Engine oil
pressure

Risk of
explosive gas.

Central
locking, lock

Rear fog
light

Central
locking,
unlock
Trunk
lid/tailgate,
opening

ABS brakes

95_U S_M 07.book Page 10 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

10
(This page has been left blank)

95_U S_M 07.book Page 11 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Safety

IB3835

Seats _______________
Head restraint ________
Safety belts __________
Child safety __________
Airbag_______________

3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars
(can depend on model variant, engine variant,
market specification, options or accessories).

18
21
12
22
29

95_U S_M 07.book Page 12 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Safety

Safety belts
WARNING
• Buckle up and adjust your safety belt
before driving off so that you can pay
full attention to the traffic.
• Safety belts must be worn at all times
by all car occupants.
• Child safety, see page 22.
• Check that the locking tongue is properly locked in the belt lock.
• In the event of a crash, the rear-seat
passengers not wearing a seatbelt will
be thrown forward against the
front-seat backrests. The stresses
imposed on the front seat passengers
and belts are multiplied and can result
in needless injury or even death for all
car occupants.

Three-point inertia-reel safety belts are provided for all seats.
The results of studies show that it is equally
important to wear safety belts in the rear
seat as in the front seats.
Bear in mind that in certain states/provinces
it is a legal requirement for all occupants of
the car to wear a safety belt.

FASTEN BELTS

Safety belt reminder
When the ignition is switched on, the ”FASTEN BELTS” reminder will light up until the
driver fastens the safety belt.
The reminder for the driver has an additional
audible signal which sounds for 6 seconds,
or until the driver fastens his belt.
The following applies to the both front
seats: If the belt is not fastened before the
car starts to move there will be an additional
reminder when the speed exceeds 15 mph
(25 km/h). The text Use your seatbelts. is
lit on the Saab Information Display (SID)
and the symbol will flash.
If the belt is not fastened then an audible
signal will come on after 30 seconds.
The text in the SID can be turned off by the
CLR-button on the steering wheel.

IB3838

95_U S_M 07.book Page 13 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Correct position for safety belt
WARNING
Proper positioning of the safety belt is
extremely important.
• An out of position safety belt can result
in the occupant sliding underneath the
belt in a crash (submarining) and
injury can result from the lap portion
cutting into the abdomen.
• Never fasten the safety belt with the
shoulder belt behind the body or pull
the belt off the shoulder and under the
arm.
• If two people share a belt, they risk
injury by being crushed together in the
event of a crash.

• Position the lap strap snugly and low
across the hips so that it just touches the
thighs. The shoulder strap must be as far
in on the shoulder as possible.
• Check to ensure that the belt is not twisted
or rubbing against any sharp edges.
• There should not be any slack in the belt.
Pull the belt tight – particularly important
when thick outer clothing is worn. It
is advisable to remove thick items of
clothing.
• Refrain from tilting the backrest more than
necessary, as the safety belt provides
better protection when the seat is in a
more upright position.
• Only one person per safety belt!
• For most of the time a safety belt is worn,
the retractor will allow the wearer freedom
of movement. The retractor locks up automatically if the belt is jerked or withdrawn
sharply, the car tilts, the brakes are
applied hard or a crash occurs.
• Children up to 6 years of age must always
be seated in a child seat. Saab recommends the use of a child seat for children
up to the age of 10.
• Children who have grown out of a child
seat should be restrained by the car’s
standard three-point belts. Make sure that
the shoulder belt is not in contact with the
neck or throat. If it is, a booster seat/cushion may be necessary.

IB410

Safety

Correctly positioned safety belt

95_U S_M 07.book Page 14 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Safety
Belt height adjustment

IB411

IB412

The front safety belts and the outside belts
in the rear (9-5 Sedan) are equipped with
automatic height adjustment.
After fastening the belt, grasp it at chest
height, pull it out and, without letting go,
allow the slack to be taken up by the reel.
Make sure that the belt is well in on the
shoulder.

To fasten the belt

Front safety belts
Fasten the belt by pulling the belt and inserting the tongue in the buckle. Check that it is
securely fastened.
Grasp the shoulder belt close to the buckle
and pull the belt towards the shoulder to
tighten the lap belt part.
Then grip the belt at the shoulder, pull it out
and, without letting go, allow the slack to be
taken up by the reel. Make sure that the belt
is well in on the shoulder.
Because the lower belt-anchorage points
are on the seat, the belt buckle follows the
movement of the seat during seat adjustment.

Press the red button to release the belt
To release the belt, press the red button on
the belt buckle, as illustrated.
See page 239 for the checking of belt function, cleaning, etc.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 15 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Safety

IB414

Safety belt pretensioners

Safety belt use during pregnancy
Pregnant women must always wear a
safety belt to protect both themselves and
the unborn child.
The lap belt should be placed low, across
the hips and over the upper thighs.

The belts of the front seats are fitted with
automatic pretensioners and force limiters.
These are activated in the event of a severe
frontal or rear-end crash and a side-on collision, provided that the safety belts are
being worn.
The pretensioners serve to reduce the forward movement of the body by tensioning
the belt. The force limiters reduce belt loads
on the body by "loosening" the safety belt to
absorb the body’s kinetic energy as gradually as possible.
The safety belt pretensioners are not activated by vehicle rollover.

WARNING
If the car is involved in a crash, the safety
belts, belt pretensioners and other components must be inspected by an authorized Saab dealer and replaced as necessary.
Never make any alterations or repairs to
the safety belt yourself. Visit an authorized Saab dealer for any necessary
repairs.

Safety belt, rear seat
WARNING
• Make sure that the belt does not
become trapped when the backrest is
folded down or raised (see page 129).
• If cargo has to be placed on a seat, it
must be properly secured with the
safety belt. This reduces the risk of the
cargo being thrown about during hard
braking or a crash, which could cause
personal injury.
• Check that the belt is not twisted or
lying against sharp edges.
• Make sure you use the correct safety
belt buckle. The buckles for the center
and left-hand rear seats are close
together.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 16 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Three-point safety belts are provided for all
three rear seat passengers.
Fasten the belt by pulling out the strap carefully and inserting the tongue in the lock.
Check that it is securely fastened.
Then grip the diagonal part of the strap near
the lock and pull the belt upwards towards
the shoulder to tighten the lap strap. The lap
strap should lie low over the hips.
The diagonal part should lie as far in on the
shoulder as possible.
To release the belt, press the red button on
the belt lock.
See page 239 for the checking of belt function, cleaning, etc.

IB415
IB???

Safety

Safety belt, rear seat

Securing an item on the rear seat

IB416

95_U S_M 07.book Page 17 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Safety
WARNING
• Safety belts are designed to bear upon
the bony structure of the body, and
should be worn low across the front of
the pelvis or the pelvis, chest and
shoulders, as applicable; wearing the
lap section of the belt across the
abdominal area must be avoided.
• Safety belts should be adjusted as
firmly as possible, consistent with
comfort, to provide the protection for
which they have been designed. A
loose belt will greatly reduce the protection afforded to the wearer.
• Care should be taken to avoid contamination of the webbing with polishes,
oils and chemicals, and particularly
battery acid. Cleaning may safely be
carried out using mild soap and water.
The belt should be replaced if webbing
becomes frayed, contaminated or
damaged.
• It is essential to replace the entire
assembly after it has been worn in a
severe impact even if damage to the
assembly is not obvious.
• Belts should not be worn with straps
twisted.

• Each belt assembly must only be used
by one occupant; it is dangerous to put
a belt around a child being carried on
the occupant´s lap.
• No modifications or additions should
be made by the user which will either
prevent the safety belt adjusting
device from operating to remove
slack, or prevent the safety belt
assembly from being adjusted to
remove slack.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 18 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Safety

Seats

The following seat adjustments can be
made to achieve a comfortable driving
position:

WARNING
The seats are actuated by powerful
motors. Bear this in mind when adjusting
the seat, and make sure that nothing gets
caught and damaged. Ensure that nothing can be trapped when adjusting the
seat.
Bear in mind that children can be injured
if they play with the electrically-operated
seats.
Always remove the ignition key when you
leave the car. This prevents personal
injury caused by the electrically adjustable seats, for example, due to children
playing.
Both front seats are electrically operated.
On certain models the driver´s seat is
equipped with a memory function.
To facilitate getting into the car, both seats
can be adjusted when either of the front
doors is open.
For safety reasons, if the door is closed, the
seat can only be adjusted when the ignition
is ON.
Note, however, that both seats can be
adjusted for 30 seconds after both doors
have been closed.

• height
• legroom
• backrest rake angle
• lumbar support 3
• head-restraint height
We recommend that adjustments to the
driver’s seat be performed in the following
order:
1 height
2 legroom
3 seat tilt angle
4 backrest rake angle
Lastly, adjust the steering wheel (see
page 114).

WARNING
Never adjust the driver’s seat except
when the car is stationary.
Side airbags
(see page 36).
Head restraint
(see page 21).

IB3225

Height
To raise the seat, lift the lower control
straight up.
To lower the seat, press the lower control
down.
The same control can be used to adjust the
height of the front and rear edges of the seat
independently.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 19 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

IB1161

IB3227

IB3226

Safety

Legroom adjustment

Backrest rake angle

Lumbar support 3

To adjust the legroom, push the lower control forward or back.

To adjust the backrest, move the upper control forward or back.

Turn the smaller wheel for stepless adjustment of the lumbar support.

WARNING
The backrest should be upright during
driving, so that the safety belt, airbag and
backrest can provide optimum protection
in the event of emergency braking or a
crash and in particular a rear-end
collision.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 20 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Safety
Memory driver’s seat 3
In certain models the driver´s seat is
equipped with a programmable memory
function. This function also includes the
door mirrors.
Adjust the seat and door mirrors.
To save the settings, press and hold the M
button and, at the same time, press one of
the preselect buttons (1, 2 or 3). The Saab
Information Display (SID) will chime to confirm that the settings have been saved.

IB404

To recall the programmed settings, press
and hold the appropriate preset button,
whereupon the seat and mirrors will be
adjusted automatically.
To change the settings stored in a preset
button, adjust the seat and mirrors as before
and save the new settings by pressing M
and the appropriate preset button.
To facilitate reversing, the passenger side
door mirror can be tilted down automatically, e.g. to show the curb. To do this,
select reverse and press the small grey
button adjacent to the door-mirror control.
When you deselect reverse, the mirror will
automatically return to its original setting
(see page 116).

95_U S_M 07.book Page 21 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Safety

Head restraint
WARNING
• Adjust the head restraint so that your
head is optimally supported and the
center of the head restraint is at ear
height, thus reducing the likelihood of
neck injury in a crash.

IB400

The front seats in the Saab 9-5 are
equipped with Saab Active Head Restraints
(SAHRs). These reduce the risk of whiplash
injury if the car is hit from behind.
In the event of a rear-end crash, the body is
forced back against the backrest. This, in
turn, causes the mechanism to press the
head restraint forward and upward, thus limiting the backward movement of the head.
The SAHR is a mechanical system, actuated by body weight. The mechanism is built
into the top of the backrest, where it is connected to the head restraint.
Therefore, the SAHR does not need to be
replaced after a minor rear-end crash.

IB460

• Raise the head restraints in the seat
that are occupied.

The head restraint can be raised or lowered
and is adjustable in various positions.
• Raising: grasp the head restraint on both
sides and pull it straight up.
• Lowering: press the catch on the left-hand
side of the attaching point and press down
the head restraint.

Rear-seat head restraints
9-5 Sedan: The rear head restraints have
three adjustment positions for passenger
comfort.
They can also be folded down to increase
the driver’s rearward vision when the seat is
unoccupied.
9-5 SportCombi: The height of the rear
head restraints can be adjusted by depressing the catch on the left-hand collar in the
same way as the front head restraints.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 22 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Safety

Child safety
WARNING
• Children must always be suitably
restrained in the car.
• ALWAYS use SAFETY BELTS and
CHILD RESTRAINTS.
• NEVER put a rear-facing child seat in
the front.
• DEATH or SERIOUS
INJURY can occur.
• Children 12 and under or
shorter than 55 inches
(140 cm) can be killed by
the airbag.
• Sit as far back as possible from the airbag.
• The BACK SEAT is the SAFEST place
for children.

Car safety tips
WARNING
• Never leave children unattended in a
car, even for a short time.
– Children can suffer heat stroke – perhaps die – in a matter of minutes.
– Children can put the car into gear and
hurt themselves or others.

WARNING

Protect children from getting
trapped in the trunk of a car

• At gas stations, take the keys from the
car while filling the tank.
• Never allow children to climb on top of
– or under cars.
• Always look for children before backing your car out of a garage or driveway.

• Teach children not to play in or around
cars.
• Watch children when loading or
unloading the car so they don’t get
locked in by mistake.
• Always lock the doors and trunk of
your car, and keep the keys out of children´s sight and reach.
• Keep the rear fold-down seats closed
to help prevent kids from getting into
the trunk from inside the car.

• To avoid carbon monoxide poisoning,
never let a car idle in an enclosed
garage.

For Trunk Release Handle information see
page 48 and 138.

• Supervise young children around
buckets of water while washing your
car. Small children can drown in a
short time in less than an inch of water.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 23 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Safety
The same attention must be given to child
safety in the car as is given to adults.
Saab recommends rearward facing child
restraints.
Children travel most safely when properly
restrained, but restraints must be suitable
for the size of the child. Always follow the
child seat/booster cushion manufacturer´s
instructions when installing these devices in
your vehicle.
Make sure you are acquainted with the
legal requirements for seating children
in the car.
Make sure that it is possible to fit a child
restraint in accordance with the manufacturer’s child seat instructions.
When fitting child seats in cars you must
always read the instructions supplied by
the manufacturer.

Lower Anchorages and Top
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System)
Your vehicle has the LATCH system. There
are LATCH anchors for the outboard seating positions of the second row, and a top
tether anchor on the center position.
This system, designed to make installation
of child restraints easier, does not use the
vehicle's safety belts. Instead, it uses vehicle anchors and child restraint attachments
to secure the restraints. Only use the attachments and straps provided with the child
restraint.
If you have any questions regarding LATCH
anchors, please contact your Saab dealer.

WARNING
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not
attached to its anchor points, the restraint
will not be able to protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child could be seriously injured or killed. Make sure that a
LATCH-type child restraint is properly
installed using the anchor points, or use
the vehicle's safety belts to secure the
restraint, following the instructions that
came with that restraint, and also the
instructions in this manual.

WARNING
Child top tether anchorages are designed
to withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly fitted child restraints.
Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult safety belts.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 24 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Safety

Lower anchor and top tether anchor locations.

IB3839

Location of lower anchors

IB1685

Semi-rigid 2-point lower attachment with
top tether

IB1684

Rigid 2-point lower attachment with top
tether

95_U S_M 07.book Page 25 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Securing a Child Restraint
Designed for the LATCH System
6

9-5 SportCombi:
Before installation, please read through
these instructions and the child restraint
installation instructions.
1 The top tether anchor is located on the
cargo floor by the rear seat backrest's
lower part (see picture). To access the
top tether anchor, unlock the rear seat
backrest (see page 132 for detailed
instructions), and fold it slightly forward.
Note! Backrest only, not the seat cushion.
2 The top tether anchor is originally
rotated downwards. To use it, it has to
be rotated upwards (see arrow in picture). Use the top tether anchor right
behind the seating position you want to
use.
3 Raise the vehicle head restraint to its
highest position (see page 21 for
detailed instructions).
4 Put the child restraint on the seat.
5 If you are using a single tether, route the
tether under the vehicle head restraint,
and attach the tether hook to the top
tether anchor. If you are using a dual
tether, route the tether around the vehicle head restraint, and attach the tether

9
10

hook to the top tether anchor. The child
restraint instructions will show you
how.
Reposition the rear seat backrest, and
make sure it locks properly. Check the
indicator on top of the backrest that it is
locked.
Find the lower anchors for the seating
position you want to use. The lower
anchors are located where the bottom of
the seatback meets the back of the seat
cushion. Above each lower anchor,
there is a label indicating its location
(see picture on page 24).
Attach and tighten the lower anchor
attachments on the child restraint to the
vehicle lower anchors. If your child
restraint does not have the lower attachments, you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the child restraint. The
child restraint instructions will show
you how.
Tighten the top tether strap according to
the child restraint instructions.
Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secured at
the lower anchors/safety belt and the top
tether anchor. The child restraint shall
be firmly attached to the vehicle.

IB4113

Safety

Child tether anchorages, Saab 9-5 SportCombi

WARNING
Make sure the child restraint anchorages
are folded all the way up or down otherwise it can obstruct locking the rear seat
backrest.

WARNING
If a cargo net is fitted, do not pull the top
tether strap through the cargo net in such
a way that there is slack in the strap to the
child seat.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 26 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Safety

Securing a Child Restraint
Designed for the LATCH System

9-5 Sedan:
Before installation, please read through
these instructions and the child restraint
installation instructions.
1 Find the lower anchors for the seating
position you want to use. The lower
anchors are located where the bottom of
the seatback meets the back of the seat
cushion. Above each lower anchor,
there is a label indicating its location
(see picture).
2 Put the child restraint on the seat.
3 Attach and tighten the lower anchor
attachments on the child restraint to the
vehicle lower anchors. If your child
restraint does not have the lower attachments, you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the child restraint. The
child restraint instructions will show
you how.
4 The top tether anchor is located on top
of the parcel shelf. Use the top tether
anchor right behind the seating position
you want to use. Open the top tether
anchor trim cover to expose the anchor.
Snap the cover to lock in open position.

5 Raise the vehicle head restraint to its
highest position (see page 21 for
detailed instructions).
6 If you are using a single tether, route the
tether under the vehicle head restraint,
and attach the tether hook to the top
tether anchor. If you are using a dual
tether, route the tether around the vehicle head restraint, and attach the tether
hook to the top tether anchor. Tighten
the top tether strap. The child restraint
instructions will show you how.
7 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secured at
the lower anchors/safety belt and the top
tether anchor. The child restraint shall
be firmly attached to the vehicle.

IB1698

Child tether anchorages in parcel shelf,
Saab 9-5 Sedan

95_U S_M 07.book Page 27 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Safety
Lockable latch plate

1 Put the child restraint on the rear seat.
2 Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap
and shoulder portions of the vehicle's
safety belt through or around the
restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how.
3 Buckle the belt. Make sure the release
button is positioned so you would be
able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if
you ever had to.
4 Tighten the safety belt. You may find it
helpful to use your knee to push down on
the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
5 While holding the safety belt tight, activate the locking function of the latch
plate by moving the button from position
2 (unlocked) to position 1 (locked).
6 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. The
child restraint shall be firmly attached to
the vehicle.
To deactivate the locking function, move the
button to position 2.

IB822

In fitting a child seat that is intended to be
secured in position by the lap portion of the
safety belt, make use of the locking function
of the latch plate. This function is available
on all seats in the second row.
Locking the lap portion of the belt lessens
the risk that the seat will work loose while
the car is in motion.
The button for the locking function is located
on the back of the latch plate.

Locking the lap belt
1 Locked
2 Unlocked

95_U S_M 07.book Page 28 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Safety

Installation of rear facing child restraints
Child restraints that are approved for rear
facing installation in the rear seat can be
positioned in any of the three rear seating
positions.

WARNING
Failure to follow all the manufacturer’s
instructions on the use of this child
restraint system can cause your child to
strike the vehicle´s interior during a
sudden stop or crash.

WARNING
A special accessory is available for locking the center armrest so that a child seat
can be installed in the middle seat. See
your Saab dealer for details.
When a rear-facing child seat is fitted in
the center position of the rear seat in the
Saab 9-5 Sedan the center armrest must
be secured in place with this strap. If this
is not done, the center armrest could
swing down in the event of a frontal crash
and cause injury to the child.

IB1204

Fitting the locking strap on the center armrest, Saab 9-5 Sedan (not needed on
SportCombi).

95_U S_M 07.book Page 29 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Safety

Airbag

WARNING

• Always wear your safety belt.
• Always adjust your seat so that you
are as far back as possible but still
able to operate the pedals and reach
the steering wheel and controls comfortably.
• Children 12 and under or shorter than
59 inches (150 cm) should always
travel in the rear seat as the car is fitted
with a passenger airbag.
• Never fit a child seat in front of the passenger airbag.
The AIRBAG system comprises an airbag in
the steering wheel, a front passenger airbag
and side airbags in the front seats.
The system supplements the protection
provided by the safety belts to further
enhance the safety of the occupants.
If a fault is detected in the AIRBAG, the
AIR BAG warning light on the main instrument panel will come on (see pages 61
and 37).

IB419

To reduce risk of injury:

Inflated airbag (driver side)
Inflation and deflation together take less than
0.1 second.

When the system is triggered by impact of a
frontal crash, the airbags in the steering
wheel and passenger side of the dash board
are inflated, after which they deflate through
vents in the back of the bags.
The entire process takes less than
0.1 second – literally, faster than the blinking of an eye.
The driver and passenger airbags are
referred to as ‘smart’ airbags. This means
that the system compensates for factors
such as the force of the collision.

Note:
The sensor reacts differently depending on
whether or not the front seatbelts on the
driver’s and passenger sides are used. Situations can therefore arise where only one
of the airbags inflates.
It is also possible for only the seatbelt pretensioners to be activated and for the airbags to remain uninflated.
These airbags are triggered only by moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal crashes.
They will not be activated by minor front-end
impacts, rear-end or side impacts, or by the
car rolling over.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 30 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Safety

IB420

• Always sit with the whole of your back
in contact with the backrest of the seat,
and with your seat as far back as is
practical. Otherwise you will be thrown
back against the backrest when the
airbag inflates which could cause you
injury or death. The airbag needs
room in which to inflate.

Passenger airbag and driver’s airbag both
inflated

WARNING
• Even if the car is equipped with AIRBAG, safety belts must still always be
worn by all occupants.
• Note that because an airbag inflates
and deflates extremely rapidly, it will
not provide protection against a
second impact occurring in the same
incident. Always use your safety belt.

• Never attach anything to the steering
wheel or passenger side of the instrument panel, as this could result in
injury if the airbag should inflate. The
same applies to anything you might
have in your mouth, such as a pipe, for
instance.
• Some components of the airbag will
be warm for a short time. In some circumstances the airbag can cause
minor burns or abrasions to the body
when the airbag inflates/deflates.
• To reduce the risk of head injuries in
the event of a crash, the headliner and
pillar trims incorporate energy absorbing material. These areas must not be
modified in any way. Work on these
areas must only be carried out by an
authorized Saab dealer.

• Fumes are generated by the chemical
reaction that inflates the airbag.
Because the dust/fumes can, in certain cases, cause irritation to the skin,
the following measures should be
taken:
Skin surfaces that show signs of irritation should be washed with clean
water and a mild soap as soon as possible.
In the event of eye irritation, flush the
eyes thoroughly with clean water for at
least 20 minutes.
In case of persistent irritation, consult
a doctor.
• Never rest your hands or forearms on
the steering-wheel center padding.
• If the AIR BAG warning light does not
extinguish after the car has been
started, or comes on or flashes while
driving, have the car checked immediately by a workshop. We recommend
that you contact an authorized Saab
dealer. The warning light could signify
that the airbags may not inflate in a
crash, or they could even inflate without a crash. See page 61.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 31 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Safety

5
2

The sensors detect
deceleration and send
a signal via the central sensor to the gas
generator that inflates
the airbag.

1
2

IB3840

Moment of impact.

AIRBAG system with belt pretensioners
The inflating airbag
cushions the driver.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Central sensor
Belt pretensioners (for both front safety belts)
Steering wheel with integral airbag
Passenger airbag
Side-airbag sensor
Side airbag
Front sensors

Accessories and other equipment must
not be fitted to the surfaces marked as
these are where the airbags inflate in the
event of a crash.

Airbag now fully
inflated.

IB3841

IB417

The airbag starts to
deflate.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 32 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Safety

Front passenger seat
WARNING

WARNING
Never secure a rear-facing child seat in
the right front seat of a car equipped with
a passenger airbag. Inflation of the airbag
in the event of a crash could seriously
injure or kill a child.
The airbags are interconnected and have a
common warning light. The passenger
airbag module is housed in the fascia above
the glove compartment and is marked
AIRBAG
Both airbags will be inflated in the event of a
moderate to severe frontal, or near-frontal
crash, even if the passenger seat is unoccupied.

• DEATH or SERIOUS
INJURY can occur.
• Children 12 and under or
shorter than 59 inches
(150 cm) can be killed by
the airbag.
• The BACK SEAT is the SAFEST place
for children.
• NEVER put a rear-facing child seat in
the front.
• Sit as far back as possible from the airbag.
• ALWAYS use SAFETY BELTS and
CHILD RESTRAINTS.
• Never allow a child to stand in front of
the seat or to sit on the lap of a
front-seat passenger. Serious injury or
death could result if the airbag is
inflated in a crash.
• The glove compartment must be
closed while travelling. An open glove
compartment door could cause leg
injuries in the event of a crash.

• Never place anything on the dash or in
front of the seat as, in addition to being
a hazard to passengers, this could
interfere with the function of the airbag
in the event of a crash. The same
applies to the mounting of accessories
on the dash.
• Keep feet on the floor – never put feet
up on the fascia, on the seat or out of
the window.
• Do not carry anything in your lap.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 33 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Safety

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator.
USA

Saab recommends that child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, including an infant
riding in a rear-facing infant seat, a child
riding in a forward-facing child seat and an
older child riding in a booster seat.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a rear-facing child restraint. A label
on your sun visor says, “Never put a
rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is
because the risk to the rear-facing child is so
great, if the airbag deploys.

IB3953

Vehicles with a passenger sensing system
have indicator LEDs on the fascia. The indicators will be lit during the system check
when you turn your ignition key to ST or ON.
When the system check is complete, either
the ON or the OFF LED, will be lit. See
AIRBAG warning light on page 61.
The passenger sensing system will turn off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag
and side airbag under certain conditions.
The driver’s airbags is not part of the passenger sensing system.
The passenger sensing system works with
sensors that are part of the right front passenger’s seat and safety belt. The sensors
are designed to detect the presence of a
properly-seated occupant and determine if
the passenger’s frontal airbag should be
enabled (may inflate) or not.
Accident statistics show that children are
safer if they are restrained in the rear rather
than the front seat.

IB3952

Passenger Sensing System

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator,
Canada

95_U S_M 07.book Page 34 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Safety
WARNING

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal airbag if the system detects a
rear-facing child restraint, no system is
fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that
an airbag will not deploy under some
unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off. Saab recommends that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in
the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.

The passenger sensing system is designed
to turn off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag if:
• the right front passenger seat is unoccupied
• the system determines that an infant is
present in a rear-facing infant seat
• the system determines that a small child
is present in a forward-facing child
restraint
• the system determines that a small child
is present in a booster seat
• a right front passenger takes his/her
weight off of the seat for a period of time
• the right front passenger seat is occupied
by a smaller person, such as a child who
has outgrown child restraints
• or if there is a critical problem with the
airbag system or the passenger sensing
system.

When the passenger sensing system has
turned off the passenger’s frontal air bag,
the off indicator will light and stay lit to
remind you that the airbag is off.
If a child restraint has been installed (Saab
recommends that child restraints be
secured in the rear seat) and the on indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the
child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall
the child restraint following the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions and refer
to Installation of rear facing child restraints
on page 28.
If after reinstalling the child restraint and
restarting the vehicle, the on indicator is still
lit, check to make sure that the vehicle’s
seatback is not pressing the child restraint
into the seat cushion. If this happens,
slightly recline the vehicle’s seatback and
adjust the seat cushion if possible. Also
make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens, adjust the head restraint.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 35 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Safety
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child
in the child restraint in a rear seat position in
the vehicle and check with your dealer.
The passenger sensing system is designed
to enable (may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontal airbag anytime the system
senses that a person of adult size is sitting
properly in the right front passenger’s seat.
When the passenger sensing system has
allowed the airbag to be enabled, the on
indicator will light and stay lit to remind you
that the airbag is active.
For some children who have outgrown child
restraints and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system may or may not turn
off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag,
depending upon the person’s seating posture and body build. Everyone in your vehicle who has outgrown child restraints
should wear a safety belt properly —
whether or not there is an airbag for that person.

If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right
front passenger’s seat, but the off indicator
is lit, it could be because that person is not
sitting properly in the seat. If this happens,
turn the vehicle off and ask the person to
place the seatback in the fully upright position, then sit upright in the seat, centered on
the seat cushion, with the person’s legs
comfortably extended. Restart the vehicle
and have the person remain in this position
for about two minutes. This will allow the
system to detect that person and then
enable the passenger’s airbag.

WARNING
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument panel cluster ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be
wrong with the airbag system. If this ever
happens, have the vehicle serviced
promptly, because an adult-size person
sitting in the right front passenger’s seat
may not have the protection of the frontal
airbag. See Airbag warning light on page
61 for more on this, including important
safety information.

Aftermarket equipment, such as seat covers, can affect how well the passenger
sensing system operates. You may want to
consider not using seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment if your vehicle has
the passenger sensing system. See Adding
Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 41 for more information about
modifications that can affect how the
system operates.

WARNING
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s
seat or between the passenger’s seat
cushion and seatback may interfere with
the proper operation of the passenger
sensing system.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 36 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Safety

Side airbags

WARNING
• This car is equipped with side airbags
and no extra interior trim should be fitted. Failure to observe this warning
could result in the side airbags not
inflating as intended and thus not providing the intended protection either.
• Never place any object in the area that
would be occupied by the inflated airbag.
• For optimum protection, sit upright in
the seat, with your safety belt correctly
fastened.
• The sensors for the side airbags are
fitted in the front doors. We advise
against doing any work on the doors
that could affect the moisture barrier in
the door or the airbag sensors. It is
essential that the moisture barrier
(thick plastic film) in the front door is
not damaged in any way.

• Improvement of the anticorrosion
treatment of the doors should only be
carried out by a workshop. We recommend that you contact an authorized
Saab dealer. Otherwise there is a risk
that the side impact sensor and the
moisture barrier in the front door could
be damaged.
• The side airbags will inflate only in the
event of a side impact; not in the event
of a front or rear-end crash or of the
car’s rolling over.
• Damage or wear to the seat cover, or
the seat seam, in the area of the side
airbag must immediately be repaired.
We recommend that you contact an
authorized Saab dealer.
• Do not modify the speaker installation
in the front doors or install speakers
other than those specifically approved
by Saab.

The side airbags, which help protect the
upper body are integrated in the outside
edges of the front seat backrests.
In a side impact, only the airbag on that side
will be activated, and only then if certain predetermined conditions are met such as the
force and angle of the impact, the speed of
the car on impact, and at which point on the
car’s side the impact occurs.
The sensors, which are fitted in the front
doors, sense the rise in pressure caused by
the door panel being pressed in during an
impact condition. The side airbag trigger will
be commanded based on the characteristics of this pressure rise.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 37 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Safety

AIRBAG warning light

IB1182

IB1707

WARNING

Side airbag inflated

Side airbag components
1
2
3
4

Side airbag
Sensor
Moisture barrier
Text on seat

• If the airbag readiness light stays on
after you start your vehicle, it means
the airbag system may not be working
properly. See page 61. The airbags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash,
or they could even inflate without a
crash.
• To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle serviced right
away if the airbag readiness light stays
on after you start your vehicle.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 38 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Safety

What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates?
After an airbag inflates, it quickly deflates,
so quickly that some people may not even
realize the airbag inflated. Some components of the airbag module - the steering
wheel hub for the driver's frontal airbag, the
instrument panel for the right front passenger's frontal airbag or the ceiling of your
vehicle near the side windows - will be hot
for a short time. The parts of the bag that
come into contact with you may be warm,
but not too hot to touch. There will be some
smoke and dust coming from the vents in
the deflated airbags. airbag inflation does
not prevent the driver from seeing or being
able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stop
people from leaving the vehicle.

WARNING
When an airbag inflates, there is dust in
the air. This dust could cause breathing
problems for people with a history of
asthma or other breathing trouble. To
avoid this, everyone in the vehicle should
get out as soon as it is safe to do so. If you
have breathing problems but cannot get
out of the vehicle after an airbag inflates,
then get fresh air by opening a window or
a door. If you experience breathing problems following an airbag deployment, you
should seek medical attention.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an
airbag, windshields are broken by vehicle
deformation. Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the right front passenger airbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflate only once.
After an airbag inflates, you will need
some new parts for your airbag system. If
you do not get them, the airbag system
will not be there to help protect you in
another crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly other parts.
The service manual for your vehicle
covers the need to replace other parts.
• Your vehicle is equipped with a crash
sensing and diagnostic module which
records information after a crash. See
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recorders on page 255.
• Let only qualified technicians work on
your airbag system. Improper service can
mean that your airbag system will not
work properly. See your dealer for service.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 39 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Safety
AIRBAG servicing
WARNING
If you damage the covering for the driver's
or the right front passenger's airbag, or
the side impact airbag covering on the
ceiling near the side windows, the bag
may not work properly. You may have to
replace the airbag module in the steering
wheel, both the airbag module and the
instrument panel for the right front passenger's airbag, or side impact airbag
module and ceiling covering for the
roof-mounted side impact airbag. Do not
open or break the airbag coverings.

The airbag must be inspected as part of the
normal service program but otherwise may
be regarded as maintenance-free.

Scrapping or working on airbags
and belt pretensioners
WARNING
• Under no circumstances should any
modifications be made that affect the
steering wheel or the airbag’s electrical circuitry.
• Before starting any welding work on
the car, always disconnect the negative (–) battery lead and cover the conductor.
• Airbags and belt pretensioners must
be deployed under controlled conditions before the car is scrapped or any
of the system’s components are
removed. Airbags or belt pretensioners that have been deployed as a
result of a crash must be replaced by
new ones.
• Airbag-system components must
never be transferred for use in another
vehicle.

• All work involving the scrapping or
replacement of airbags or belt pretensioners must only be carried out by
knowledgeable personnel.
• The headlining and roof pillar trim
must not be modified in any way. Work
on these areas must only be carried
out at a Saab dealer.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 40 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Safety

Frequently asked questions on
function of airbags
Do you still need to wear a safety belt if airbags are fitted?
Yes, always! The airbag merely supplements the car’s normal safety system.
Moreover, the airbag will only be actuated in
a moderate to severe frontal, or near-frontal
crash, which means, of course, that it provides no protection in minor frontal crashes,
major rear-end or side-on crashes or if the
car rolls over.
The safety belts help reduce the chance of
the car occupants from being thrown around
and injured or killed inside the car.
But they also ensure that, if a crash occurs
in which the airbags are inflated, the airbag
will make the optimum contact with the
occupant, i.e. square on from the front. If the
occupant meets the airbag in an offset position, the protection afforded will be reduced.
In addition, airbags provide no protection
against a secondary impact occurring in the
same incident. So there is no doubt about
the benefit of wearing safety belts at all
times.
Do not sit too close to the airbag: it needs
room to inflate.
The airbag inflates very quickly and powerfully in order to protect an adult person,
before they are thrown forward, in a serious
frontal crash.

How do I position the seat to leave room for
the airbag to inflate?
Don’t have your seat too far forward.
Recline the seat back to increase the distance between you and the airbag. For short
drivers, special accessory pedal extensions
are available through your Saab dealer.
Airbags inflate extremely rapidly and with
great force – to be fast enough to protect an
adult in the seat.
When do the front airbags inflate?
The airbag will only be inflated under certain
predetermined conditions in a moderate to
severe frontal, or near-frontal crash,
depending on such factors as the force and
angle of the impact, the speed of the car on
impact, and the resistance to deformation of
the impacting object.
The airbag can only be activated once in the
same incident.
Do not attempt to drive the car after an
airbag has been inflated, even if it is
possible.

What won’t trigger the front airbags?
The airbag will not be activated in all
front-end crashes. For instance, if the car
has hit something relatively soft and yielding
(e.g. a snow drift or a hedge) or a solid
object at a low impact speed, the airbag will
not necessarily be triggered.
How loud is the inflation?
The noise of the inflation is certainly loud,
but it is very short-lived and will not damage
your hearing. For a short time afterwards
you could experience a buzzing noise in
your ears.
Most people who have experienced it
cannot remember the noise of the inflation
at all – all they remember is the noise of the
crash.
Can you still use a child seat in the front if a
passenger airbag is installed?
Definitely not!
• Children 12 and under or shorter than
55 inches (140 cm) can be killed by the
airbag.
• The BACK SEAT is the SAFEST place for
children.
• NEVER put a child seat in the front.
• Sit as far back as possible from the airbag.
• Always use safety belts and child
restraints.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 41 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Safety
Are the smoke and fumes given off when the
airbag operates at all harmful?
Most people who have remained in a car
with little or no ventilation for several minutes complained only of minor irritation of
the throat and eyes. Avoid as far as possible
getting dust on your skin as there is a risk of
skin irritation.
If you suffer from asthma, the incident may
bring on an attack, in which case you should
follow the normal procedure advised by
your doctor. It is advisable to consult a
doctor afterwards.

What should I do if the AIRBAG warning
light comes on?
If the warning light is on, it means that a fault
has been detected in the system. The
airbag cannot be relied on to operate as
intended and it might even be activated
erroneously. You should therefore take the
car to an authorized Saab dealer as soon as
possible.

Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Is there anything I might add to the front or
sides of the vehicle that could keep the airbags from working properly?
Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s frame, bumper system, front end or
side sheet metal or height, they may keep
the airbag system from working properly.
Also, the airbag system may not work properly if you relocate any of the airbag sensors. If you have any questions about this,
you should contact Saab Customer Assistance before you modify your vehicle.
The phone numbers and addresses for
Customer Assistance can be found on
page 253.
Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my advanced airbag system?
Changing or moving any parts of the front
seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing and
diagnostic module or the inside rearview
mirror can affect the operation of the
advanced airbag system. If you have questions, call Customer Assistance. The phone
numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance can be found on page 253.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 42 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Safety

(This page has been left empty.)

95_U S_M 07.book Page 43 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Security

IB4116

Doors _______________
Central locking _______
Car alarm ____________

3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars
(can depend on model variant, engine variant,
market specification, options or accessories).

44
44
50

95_U S_M 07.book Page 44 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Security

Doors

Key / Remote control

Door handles
Pull the handle to open the door.
If the door is stuck (e.g. if frozen), hold the
handle from above to secure a better grip.

Central locking
WARNING
Leaving children or pets unattended in a
locked car is dangerous. It is also dangerous to leave children in a vehicle with the
ignition key. A child or others could be
badly injured or even killed.

The key unit consists of a mechanical key
with integrated remote control.
The mechanical key is used for manual
locking and unlocking.
The remote control is used for remote locking and unlocking.
The key fits all the car’s locks.
The key supplied with the car has a code
number on a black plastic tag that needs to
be quoted for ordering additional keys. You
should therefore make a careful note of the
number.
The key contains a unique electronic code
for your car. When the key is inserted in the
ignition, the code is checked. If it matches,
the car can be started.
Your car is supplied with two keys. It is possible to have up to four keys for a car at one
time. If you loose one key you should have
this replaced as soon as possible by contacting your Saab dealer. When the new key
is programmed into the system, the missing
key is automatically erased.
NOTE: For this reason, we strongly advise
you to take two keys with you on long journeys and to keep them separate. If all keys
are lost, it will be necessary to replace costly
electronic components as well as the keys.
This loss and replacement cost is not covered by the new car warranty.
If an additional key is to be added, all of the
original keys must be brought to the dealer
so that the control module can ”learn” to recognize the new components.

NOTICE
The key contains delicate electronics.
• Do not expose it to water.
• Avoid rough handling.
• Do not place the key where it may be
subjected to high temperatures, e.g.
on the instrument panel.
• The key may malfunction if it becomes
very cold. Warm it in your hands for a
couple of minutes.
• Never open the key. For changing the
battery, see page 49.
To check the number of keys that are programmed for the car; see page 54.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 45 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Security

Locking/unlocking the car

When the car is locked and unlocked the
theft alarm is also affected.

Key / Remote control
1 To lock
2 To unlock
3 Opening the trunk (9-5 Sedan)
Unlocking the tailgate (9-5 SportCombi)

Press
once on the control: all doors
locked.
The hazard warning lights will flash once.
The trunk/tailgate release switch on the
driver´s door will not work when all doors are
locked.
It is now not possible to unlock the doors
from within using the
center console.

button on the

Remote unlocking
Press
once on the control: the driver´s
door is unlocked. Press a second time to
unlock the rest of the doors but not the
trunk/tailgate.
The hazard warning lights will flash twice.

IB451

IB3153

Remote locking

Switch for operation of central locking

The central locking can also be operated
from inside the car by means of the
switch on the center console.
This switch is inoperative when the car is
locked from the outside using the remote
control.
The interior locking buttons on each door
affect only the respective door.
If the car is left with the doors open, the interior lighting and the courtesy lights in the
doors will be switched off automatically after
20 minutes, to prevent a drain on the battery. In such cases the electrically operated
seats will not function.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 46 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Security
WARNING

The remote control also works from inside
the car. Therefore, hold the key in such a
way that the buttons are not unintentionally pressed when the key is turned, or
inserted or removed from the ignition
switch.
Otherwise, the doors may be unintentionally locked or the tailgate unlocked. On
Sedan models, the trunk may even be
opened.
Having the doors locked when you are
driving will reduce the likelihood of:
• Passengers, especially children,
opening doors and falling out of the
car.
• Intruders entering the car when it is
moving slowly or at a standstill.
However, you must also remember that
locked doors can hamper rescuers in the
event of a crash.

If remote unlocking should fail to work
Unlock the front door with the key. To
silence the alarm, insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it to the ON position.
The car can now be started. Contact a workshop to have the system checked and
repaired. We recommend that you contact
an authorized Saab dealer.
Locking by key (1)
When the car is locked and unlocked the
theft alarm is also affected.
Turn the key clockwise: all doors locked.
The trunk/tailgate release/unlock switch on
the driver’s door will not work when all doors
are locked. Nor will the switch on the center
console.
Unlocking by key (2)
Turn the key counterclockwise once: the
driver´s door will unlock.
Turn the key counterclockwise twice: all
doors, but not tailgate, unlocked. Switch in
driver´s door and switch in center console
enabled.

1
2
IB1555

Locking/unlocking by key
1 To lock
2 To unlock

95_U S_M 07.book Page 47 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Security

Child safety locks

IB1871

The rear doors are equipped with child
safety locks that are operated by means of
a catch adjacent to the door lock.
Insert a key and turn the catch 45° clockwise
or counterclockwise as indicated by the
label on the door.
When the child safety catch is in the locked
position, the door cannot be opened from
the inside.

WARNING
If small children ride in the rear seats, the
safety locks on rear doors should be activated to prevent unintentional opening
from the inside.

Child safety lock on rear doors

Trunk lid switch

Trunk lid lock, 9-5 Sedan
The trunk lid lock is independent of the central-locking system. The trunk lid release
switch on the driver’s door is inoperative
when the car is locked from the outside or
moving at a speed greater than 2.7 mph
(4 km/h).

95_U S_M 07.book Page 48 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Security
Tailgate, 9-5 SportCombi

Unlocking
The trunk lid is slightly opened/unlocked
using:

The tailgate is not unlocked when the other
car doors are unlocked. The tailgate button
on the driver’s door is inoperative when the
car is locked from outside or moving at a
speed greater than 2.7 mph (4 km/h).

• The
button on the key
• The trunk lid switch on the inside of the
driver’s door (if the car is unlocked and at
a standstill)
Remote unlocking is confirmed by the direction indicators flashing three times.
The trunk lid switch on the driver’s door is
inoperative when the car is locked.
Locking
The trunk lid release is locked automatically
when closed.

IB1833

Unlocking
The tailgate is unlocked using:

Trunk Release Handle

Trunk Release Handle
There is a glow-in-the-dark trunk release
handle located inside the trunk on the latch.
This handle will glow following exposure to
light. Pull the release handle down to open
the trunk from the inside.

NOTICE
The trunk release handle was not
designed to be used to tie down the trunk
lid or as a an anchor point when securing
items in the trunk. Improper use of the
trunk release could damage it.

• The
button on the key
• The tailgate switch on the inside of the
driver’s door (if the car is unlocked and at
a standstill)
Unlocking is confirmed by the direction indicators flashing three times.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 49 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Security
Locking
The tailgate is locked using:
• The

button on the key

IB3160

• The
button on the center console
• The key in the driver’s door.
• When vehicle speed exceeds 2.7 mph
(4 km/h).

Grab handle

NOTICE
Use the grab handle to assist in closing
the tailgate.
Avoid the following, due to the risk of lock
mechanism damage when the tailgate is
closed.
• Never grasp the lock mechanism as
this can lock the mechanism.
• Never close the lock mechanism
manually.

Electronic starting interlock
(immobilizer)
Each time the key is removed from the ignition, the electronic starting interlock is activated and the car is thus immobilized, see
also page 51.

Reprogramming lock system
functions
Certain lock system functions can be reprogrammed by your authorized Saab dealer;
see page 270.

Changing the key battery
When the battery voltage in the key falls
below a predetermined level the Saab Information Display (SID) will issue the following
message:
”Remote control battery
low. Replace battery.”
Press the CLR button on the SID to
acknowledge this message. You must then
replace the battery without delay to avoid
malfunctions. The life of the battery is normally 4 years.Contact a Saab dealer to
have the battery replaced.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 50 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Security

Car alarm

1
WARNING

The car alarm (anti-theft system) is activated/deactivated when the car is
locked/unlocked by the remote control or by
the key, see page 45.
The antenna for the alarm system is located
in the center console.
All the doors plus trunk lid/tailgate and hood
are monitored by microswitches.

IB3153

Leaving children or pets unattended in a
locked car is dangerous. It is also dangerous to leave children in a vehicle with the
ignition key. A child or others could be
badly injured or even killed.

Remote control
1 Activate/lock
2 Deactivate/unlock
3 Unlock trunk/tailgate
Unlocking the tailgate (9-5 SportCombi)

Your Saab 9-5 is equipped with an Electronic starting interlock (immobilizer), see
page 51 for details.

The car alarm is armed 10 seconds after the
car has been locked by the remote control.
During this ten-second delay period, the
doors, trunk lid/tailgate and hood may still
be opened without the alarm being triggered.
The LED indicator on the instrument panel
fascia will be on continuously during this
period, at the end of which it will start to flash
(once every other second).
If a door or the trunk lid/tailgate or hood has
been left open when the car is locked, the
LED on the fascia will flash (three times per
second) for ten seconds to indicate this.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 51 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Security
Check to ensure that all the doors, plus
trunk lid/tailgate and hood, are closed properly.
If the fault persists (LED flashing when
another attempt is made to activate the car
alarm by remote control), lock the car using
the key instead. The car alarm will not have
been activated and you should contact an
authorized Saab dealer.
To avoid inconvenience caused by the
alarm being triggered inadvertently, make
sure that anyone else using the car is familiar with how both the car alarm and the locking system work.
If the alarm is tripped (the direction indicators are flashing and the horn is on) it can be
turned off by unlocking the car using the
button.

Activating the car alarm
The car alarm cannot be activated if the
driver’s door is open or if the ignition switch
is in ON position.
If one of the other doors or the trunk or hood
is open or opened and not closed again
during the 10-second delay period, it will be
excluded from the alarm function.
If it is then closed, a new delay period of ten
seconds will start, and the door (or trunk or
hood) will once again be secured by the
alarm system.
As usual, the LED will be on continuously
during the new delay period and will start to
flash once every other second after the
10-second period has elapsed.

Electronic starting interlock
(immobilizer)
When the key is inserted in the ignition, a
signal is sent to the receiver. If the signal is
verified, the engine can be started.
Each time the key is removed from the ignition, the electronic immobilizer is activated.
This means that the car cannot be started
without the correct key inserted in the ignition and the immobilizer thus deactivated.
If a fault is detected (e.g. in the transmitter)
”Key not accepted.
Contact service.”
will appear on the Saab Information Display
(SID).
In this case, you can still start the car if you
turn the ignition key to ON and press one of
the buttons on the key (providing that the
receiver gets the right signal from the key).
Take the car to an authorized Saab dealer
to have the system checked.
The LED double-flashes when the car is
immobilized.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 52 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Security

Alarm signals

Panic-function

When the car alarm is armed, it will be triggered if any door, or the trunk lid or hood, is
opened.
The alarm will also be triggered if an attempt
is made to bypass or short-circuit the ignition switch, or to disconnect the battery.
If the alarm is triggered, the following alarm
signals will be set off:

In the car alarm system there is a feature
called "Panic-function".
To activate panic function:

• Flashing of hazard warning lights for five
minutes.
• Horn wailing for 30 seconds.
The alarm signals will stop if the alarm is
deactivated (car unlocked) during the alarm
period.

• Push and hold one of the buttons on the
key for 2 seconds. Or, if you are sitting
inside the car, push the LOCK-switch on
the center console for 2 seconds.
These actions will trigger the alarm (hazard
warning lights and horn).
To deactivate panic function:
• Push one of the buttons on the key, push
the LOCK-switch in the center console,
turn the key in the driver´s door or turn the
ignition to ON.
When the panic-function is activated the car
will be locked/unlocked depending upon
which button was pushed.
When the ignition is ON the panic-function
cannot be activated.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 53 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Security
Overview of functions
Locking/
activation

Hazard warning lights flash once.
The LED will come on for 10 seconds.

Unlocking/
deactivation

Hazard warning lights flash twice.
The LED will come on for two seconds.

Unlocking/
Hazard warning lights flash three times.
deactivation of The LED will flash three times per second for
trunk lid/tailgate 10 seconds.
alarm
Alarm triggered Hazard warning lights flash for 5 min.
Horn wails for 30 seconds.
To switch off the alarm, deactivate the system in
the normal way (unlocking).
Key

The range of the key is normally 5–10 yds. (5–
10 metres), although it can be substantially more
than this in ideal conditions (range can vary
greatly depending on the position of the car and
its surroundings).
If the key is not working, it may be because the
code signal has not been synchronized with that
in the control module for the car alarm. To rectify
this, press the unlock button on the key at least
four times in quick succession. When it is recognized, the door locks will cycle.
If a key is lost, the new one will have to be programmed (all keys must be present) to match the
car’s unique security code. We recommend that
you contact an authorized Saab dealer.

Battery for key

The battery for the key will normally have a life of
4 years. When the battery needs changing,
”Remote control battery
low. Replace battery.”
will appear on the Saab Information Display
(SID).
We recommend that you contact an authorized
Saab dealer.

Car-battery
voltage

If the battery is disconnected while the alarm is
active (car is locked), for example during an
attempt to steal the car, the alarm will be
triggered.

Alarm signals may differ between model variants for different
countries.
Some of the car-alarm functions can be reprogrammed – consult your Saab dealer for further details (see page 270).

95_U S_M 07.book Page 54 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Security

Overview of LED signals and SID messages
Status

LED signal

Activation (during 10-second delay). Comes on for 10 seconds.
Alarm activated (after delay).

Flashes once every other
second.

Deactivation.

Comes on for 2 seconds.

Alarm not activated.

Off.

Door, trunk lid/tailgate or hood open Flashes three times per secor opened during delay period.
ond for 10 seconds.
Unlocking the trunk lid/tailgate.

Flashes three times per second for 10 seconds.

Closing of door, trunk lid/tailgate or
hood after delay period.

Comes on for 10 seconds.

Car immobilized but not locked.
Car alarm not activated.

Flashes twice at three seconds intervals.

Fault in a switch serving doors, hood Flashing (instead of being
or trunk lid.
on continuously) during
delay period.
Some signals may differ between model variants for different
countries.

SID message

Reason/action

Theft protection failure.
Contact service.

Probably a fault in one of the sensors
or the horn.
Have the car checked by a workshop.
We recommend that you contact an
authorized Saab dealer.

Key not accepted.
Contact service.

Fault in key transmitter or in ignition-switch receiver.
Turn ignition switch to ON and press
the unlock button on the key. Start
the engine.
Have the car checked by a workshop.
We recommend that you contact an
authorized Saab dealer.

Remote control battery
low. Replace battery.

Fit a new battery in the key. We recommend that you contact an authorized Saab dealer.

• REMOTE KEY
• TRANSPONDR

Turn the ignition key to position ON
and then press the button for opening the trunk lid. Saab Information
Display (SID) displays the number of
keys and transmitters (transponders)
coded to the car.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 55 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Security
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user´s authority to operate the equipment.
Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may
not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 56 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Security

(This page has been left blank)

95_U S_M 07.book Page 57 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Instruments and controls

IB4527

Indicator and warning
lights ______________
Instruments __________
Saab Information Display
(SID) _______________
Switches ____________
Automatic climate control
(ACC) ______________

3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars
(can depend on model variant, engine variant,
market specification, options or accessories).

58
64
68
73
79

95_U S_M 07.book Page 58 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Instruments and controls

Indicator and warning
lights
A number of indicator and warning lights will
come on when the ignition is switched on
prior to starting. Under normal conditions,
these should go out a few seconds after the
engine has started (see page 64).

Engine malfunction
(CHECK ENGINE)

IB4117

WARNING

U.S. shown, Canada similar
Main instrument panel
1
2
3
4
5

Tachometer
Indicator and warning lights
Speedometer
Indicator and warning lights
Pressure gauge 3

6
7
8
9

Fuel gauge
Engine temperature gauge
Odometer and trip meter
Trip meter reset button

An illuminated ”Engine malfunction
(CHECK ENGINE)” indicator light indicates an engine-related problem. While
your car may be able to be driven with the
”Engine malfunction (CHECK ENGINE)”
indicator light illuminated (Limp-home
mode), you are advised to have your car
serviced at an authorized Saab dealer as
soon as possible.
Continued driving without this problem
being corrected might cause serious further damage to your car and create
unsafe driving conditions. The driver
should be prepared to take action if such
unsafe conditions arise (e.g.brake
smoothly, engage neutral, stop in a suitable place, switch off the engine, etc.).

95_U S_M 07.book Page 59 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Instruments and controls
This light indicates a malfunction in the
fuel-injection or ignition system. The car
may still be driven with care and with somewhat diminished performance (see
page 144).

NOTICE
The car should be checked immediately
at a workshop to prevent more serious
faults from arising. We recommend that
you contact an authorized Saab dealer.

Warning, oil pressure
(engine oil)
This light will come on if the engine oil pressure is dangerously low. If the light flashes
or comes on while you are driving, stop the
car, switch off the engine and check the
engine oil level (see page 194).

NOTICE
Under no circumstances must the car be
driven when this warning light is on. Low
oil pressure can result in serious engine
damage.

Warning, charging

Brake warning light

This light will come on if the battery is discharging. If it comes on while you are driving, stop the car as soon as possible and
switch off the engine.
Check the alternator drive belt (see page
201). If the belt has broken:

This light will come on if there is insufficient
brake fluid in the reservoir (see pages 196).
If the ABS warning light is on at the same
time, the ABS system may be inoperative
because of a fault (see ”Anti-lock brake
warning”, page 60).

• the engine may overheat (cooling system
will not function properly)
• the battery will not be charged
• the A/C compressor will not run and
• power assistance for the steering will be
lost.

WARNING
• Never drive the car when this warning
lights is on. Danger of brake failure!
• If the level of brake fluid in the reservoir is below the MIN mark, the car
should be towed to a workshop. We
recommend that you contact an
authorized Saab workshop.
• Have the brake system checked at
once by a workshop. We recommend
that you contact an authorized Saab
dealer.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 60 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Instruments and controls
Parking brake warning
light

This light will show when the parking brake
is on (see page 165).
The parking brake is mechanical and operates on the rear wheels.

WARNING
• Always apply the parking brake when
parking, see page 165.
• Always apply the parking brake
before removing the ignition key.
• Do not apply the parking brake while
the car is moving.

Anti-lock brake warning
This light will come on if a fault has occurred
in the ABS system.
On certain variants
and
can light
up to indicate a fault in the electronic brake
force distribution system (distribution of the
brake pressure between the front and rear
wheels).
Conventional braking without the ABS function will still be available.
For safety reasons, stop the car and check
the level of the brake fluid (see page 196).
If the level is normal, depress the brake
pedal firmly two or three times. Now check
the level again. If the level is still normal, you
may drive the car, with considerable caution, to the nearest authorized Saab dealer
to have the brake system checked.

WARNING
• If the ABS is inoperative, there is a
danger of the rear wheels locking up
on hard braking.
• If the level of brake fluid in the reservoir is below the MIN mark, the car
should be towed to an authorized
Saab dealer.

Headlight and parking
light indicator
This light indicates that the headlights or the
parking lights are on.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 61 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Instruments and controls

Airbag warning light
This light will come on if a potentially serious
fault has occurred in the airbag system.

Indicator, fuel
This light comes on when there is less than
about 2.5 gallons (10 liters) of fuel left in the
tank.

WARNING
NOTICE
• If the airbag readiness light stays on
after you start your vehicle, it means
the airbag system may not be working
properly.
• To help avoid injury to yourself or
others, have your vehicle serviced
right away if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start your vehicle.
The light will come on for about three seconds when the ignition switch is turned to
the Start or Drive position. It should go out
after the engine has started.

If the car runs out of fuel, air can be drawn
in with the fuel, which, in turn, can cause
the catalytic converter to be damaged by
overheating.

Xenon headlight fault
indicator 3
This light indicates that there is a fault in the
Xenon headlight system, which consists of
xenon headlights and an automatic levelling
system.
If a fault arises in the Xenon headlight system, the headlights will be angled down to
avoid impairing the vision of drivers in
oncoming traffic. Adjust your speed accordingly as visibility will be reduced.

NOTICE
If the Xenon headlight fault indicator lights
up, have your car checked as soon as
possible a workshop. We recommend
that you contact an authorized Saab
dealer.
If you do not rectify the problem, nighttime
visibility will be poor since the range of the
headlights is reduced.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 62 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Instruments and controls

Indicator, cruise control
This light shows when the cruise-control
system is active (see page 159).

Indicator, high beam
This light shows when the headlights are on
high beam (see page 73).

Indicator, rear fog light
This light shows when the rear fog light is on
(see page 74).
The rear fog light is switched off automatically when the engine is switched off. When
the fog light is next needed, it will have to be
switched on manually again.
The rear fog light consists of one light so it
should not be mistaken for brake lights.

Indicator, open door
If a door has not been closed properly, the
pictogram will indicate the door concerned
(or tailgate).

Indicator, SPORT-mode
automatic transmission 3
This light will come on in cars with automatic
transmission when the S (SPORT) button
on the selector lever has been pressed
(position N or D) see page 158.
In this mode, the gear changes occur later,
at higher engine revs, giving the engine and
transmission a sportier feel.
To cancel the SPORT mode, press the S
button on the selector lever again. The
mode is also deselected automatically
when the selector lever is moved to P, R, M
or L, or when the ignition is switched off.

Automatic transmission 3,
fault indicator
On a car with an automatic transmission,
this warning symbol is illuminated if a fault
has been detected in the transmission.
Switch the ignition off and on again to check
if the fault persists.
Even if the fault persists, it is still possible in
most cases to drive the car (see page 154).
Have the automatic transmission checked
by an authorized Saab dealer as soon as
possible.

NOTICE
If the control module has actuated the
Limp-home function for the automatic
transmission, the car will remain in 5th
gear when D is selected, making it very
sluggish. To overcome this, select position L to prevent unnecessary wear on the
transmission. The transmission then
starts in 2nd gear. When the car is moving
you can select position D.
When the indicator light is on, the car
must not be driven with a trailer attached.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 63 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Instruments and controls

ESP®

system, indicator

ESP®

The
indicator light is located in the
tachometer and will be illuminated when the
ESP® regulation is occurring, i.e. when
there is insufficient traction between the
tires and the road surface to provide the grip
required for the acceleration called for. The
driver can also sense that the engine is not
responding normally to the accelerator.
Operation of the ESP® indicates reduced
traction between the tires and the road, and
that extra care should be taken by the driver.
In normal driving, the ESP® system will help
to improve both ride comfort and safety, but
must not be regarded as a system to enable
the driver to drive at or maintain a higher
rate of speed. The same precautions for
safe cornering and driving on slippery roads
must still be applied (see page 163).

ESP® system, OFF-indicator
The indicator light goes on when the system
is switched off with the ESP® button.
IMPORTANT: the system is automatically
engaged every time the engine is started
(see page 163).
The indicator light also goes on when there
is a fault in the system. In this case the light
cannot be turned off by means of the ESP®
button. If a fault is indicated, have the
system checked by an authorized Saab
dealer.
See also Electronic Stability Program
(ESP® ) on page 163.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 64 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

IB3847

IB4157

Instruments and controls

IB4468

1 Cars with automatic transmission

Instruments
Tachometer

Autochecking of lights,
main instrument panel
The above warning and indicator lights
should come on when the ignition is
switched on prior to starting. They should go
out after about 3 seconds.
The following lights light up until the engine
is started, presuming that no fault exists:
• Oil pressure warning light
• Warning, charging

The tachometer indicates the engine speed
in thousands of revolutions per minute. The
needle may be allowed to enter the broken
red zone on the dial only for an instant.
A safety cut-out function (in the fuel system)
prevents the engine speed from exceeding
approximately 6,000 rpm.

Odometer and trip meter
The odometer records the distance traveled
in miles on U.S. vehicles and on Canadian
vehicles the distance indicated is in kilometres, and the trip meter in miles and tenths
(kilometres and tenths of kilometres on
Canadian vehicles).

Reset button
The reset button has two functions, determined by whether the ignition is ON or OFF.
• When the ignition is ON, pressing the
button will reset the trip meter.
• When the ignition is OFF, the display
lights up enabling you to read the odometer and trip meter. Pressing the button a
second time will reset the trip meter.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 65 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

IB3851

IB3850

IB4120

Instruments and controls

Speedometer

Fuel gauge

Temperature gauge

(U.S. speedometer shown)
The speedometer receives signals from the
wheel sensors in the ABS system.
Cars sold in U.S.: The speedometer displays the speed of the car in miles per hour
(mph).
Cars sold in Canada: The speedometer displays the speed of the car in kilometres per
hour (km/h).

Fuel-tank capacity, 18.5 US gal. (70 liters).
The fuel gauge shows the amount of fuel left
in the tank. When this is down to about
2.5 gal. (10 liters), a warning light on the
main instrument panel will come on (see
page 61).
Use the Saab Information display (SID) to
check the approximate distance that can be
traveled on the remaining fuel
(see page 68).

The temperature gauge shows the temperature of the coolant. The needle should be
in the middle of the scale when the engine
is at normal operating temperature.
If the needle approaches the red zone,
which can occur in very hot weather or when
the engine is under a heavy load, drive in the
highest gear possible, keep the engine revs
low and avoid shifting down.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 66 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Instruments and controls

NOTICE
If the needle, despite the above action,
enters the red zone, stop the car immediately, let the engine idle.
If the needle stays in the red zone, stop
the engine.
Check fuse 1 (radiator fan) in the fuse panel
under the hood, see page 220.
If the needle repeatedly enters the red zone,
stop the car as soon as it is safe to do so and
check the coolant level by looking at the
level visible through the plastic tank – do not
remove the cap.

If the coolant level falls below the MIN mark,
the Saab Information Display (SID) will display the message
”Coolant level low.
Refill.”.

WARNING
Never open the cap of the expansion tank
completely when the engine is hot, open
with care. The pressure in the cooling-system can cause hot coolant and
steam to be released. Failure to heed this
warning may result in personal injury.

IB3852

Pressure gauge
The turbo gauge indicates the air volume for
combustion, which is equivalent to the
engine load.
Under certain barometric conditions, the
needle may enter the first part of the red
zone without necessarily indicating that a
fault has arisen.
If the needle repeatedly enters the red zone
and the engine at the same time loses
power because the monitoring system is
limiting boost pressure, you should contact
a workshop immediately. We recommend
that you contact an authorized Saab workshop.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 67 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Instruments and controls

IB4158

When the speed of the car exceeds 130 mph
(210 km/h) acceleration is limited by a
reduction in boost pressure. The turbo
gauge will move to the middle field, indicating a drop in engine output and consequently a reduction in vehicle speed.

Selector lever indication 3
The display below the speedometer indicates the position of the selector lever. If
manual mode is selected, the current gear
is displayed. When the sport function is
selected, SPORT is displayed.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 68 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Instruments and controls

Saab Information
Display (SID)
WARNING
It is strongly recommended that the SID
settings be changed only when the car is
stationary. The driver’s attention can otherwise easily be distracted from the road.
The Saab Information Display (SID) shows
CHECK messages and incorporates eight
trip-computer functions.
Use the i/SET button to browse the functions.

SID provides the following function:
Temp.

Outside temperature

D.T.E.

Estimated range (distance to
empty fuel tank)

Fuel Ø

Average fuel consumption
since function last reset

Dist.

Distance to destination/Trip
meter

Speed Ø

Average speed since function
last reset

Alarm

Alarm function

Speed W.

Speed warning

Outdoor temperature
(Frost warning)
Regardless of which function has been
selected, except Night Panel Mode, SID will
automatically display the outdoor temperature when it is between 26° and 38°F (–3°
and +3°C). This also applies if the
temperature has moved outside the range
of 21° to 43°F (–6° to +6°C) but is again
between 26° and 38°F (–3° and +3°C).

IB3928

SID, buttons and display

WARNING
Remember that roads can be icy even at
temperatures of above 38°F (+3°C),
especially on bridges and stretches of
road that are sheltered from the sun.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 69 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Instruments and controls

Entering values for the functions

Alarm

Activating speed warning

Dist.
1 Select Dist. using the i/SET button.
2 Hold i/SET depressed until a chime
sounds and the selected function is
marked.

1 Select Alarm with the i/SET button.
2 Hold i/SET depressed until a chime
sounds. Briefly press the i/SET button if
you do not wish to change the alarm
time.
If you wish to change the alarm time,
press
or
.
End with a brief press on the i/SET
button.
ON appears to the right of the alarm time to
indicate that the alarm will go off at the set
time.
When the alarm sounds, it can be deactivated with CLR.

1 Select Speed W. with the i/SET button.
2 Hold i/SET depressed until a chime
sounds. Briefly press the i/SET button if
you do not wish to change speed.
If you wish to change speed, press
or
.
End with a brief press on the i/SET button.
ON appears to the right of the speed if a
warning will sound when vehicle speed
exceeds the set speed.

3 Set the distance using
or
.
4 End with a brief press on the i/SET button.
The calculated arrival time will then
appear next to the distance.
SID calculates arrival time using the set distance and average vehicle speed.
The values are updated during the trip. If
you take a break, this time is added to the
previously calculated arrival time.
After the distance to destination has
decreased to zero, Dist. will function as a
trip meter (see "Using Dist. as a trip meter").
The starting value for the trip meter will be
the last distance set for the Dist. function.
Example: 100 miles is set for the Dist. function. Once the countdown has reached
0 mile, the Dist. function will act as a trip
meter, beginning at 100 miles.

Disengaging speed warning
1 Select Speed W. with the i/SETbutton.
2 Briefly press the CLR button.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 70 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Instruments and controls

Using Dist. as a trip meter
If no value is programmed in Dist., it functions as a trip meter. This is indicated by an
arrow to the right in the display.
Reset the trip meter by briefly pressing the
CLR button.
Calculating the arrival time if a specified
average speed is maintained:
1 Select Dist.
2 Set the distance.
3 Select Speed Ø.
4 Set the average speed you intend to
drive at.
5 SID switches to Dist. automatically. The
calculated arrival time is now displayed
to the right.
The Speed Ø function will show actual
values once you start driving.

Average fuel consumption, Fuel Ø
The average fuel consumption is calculated
using the values for fuel consumed and distance driven since last reset. This value is
stored in the car’s trip computer even when
the engine is switched off.
To reset the value, hold CLR depressed
until a chime sounds. The text Cleared is
displayed.

Resetting values
To reset the value, hold CLR depressed
until a chime sounds. The text Cleared is
displayed.
The following functions will be reset simultaneously:
• D.T.E. (the value is reset to the distance
that can be reached with the amount of
remaining fuel)
• Fuel Ø
• Speed Ø (average speed)
Values programmed in Dist., Alarm and
Speed W. are not reset. See respective
function

95_U S_M 07.book Page 71 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

CHECK messages
When the engine is started, CHECKING will
appear on the display for about 4 seconds
while the SID CHECK functions are being
performed.
When a CHECK message is activated while
driving, a chime sounds and the message
appears in SID. The number of possible
CHECK messages varies depending on the
car’s specifications.
If more than one CHECK message has
been generated, the + symbol will appear to
the left of the text on the display. The messages appear in order of priority.
If a new fault occurs whilst another message
is being displayed, the message relating to
the new one will appear for 10 seconds,
after which the display will return to the earlier one.
Briefly press the CLR button to acknowledge a message from the display. After
acknowledgement, the message is displayed each time the ignition is re-started
until remedied.

The following messages may be displayed:
Message
Use your seatbelts.

See
page
12

Front light failure.

204

Rear light failure.

208

Fog light failure.

205

Brake light failure.

208

Washer fluid level low.
Refill.

203

Coolant level low.
Refill.

195

Remote control battery
low. Replace battery.

Key not accepted.
Contact service.

Instruments and controls

Theft protection failure.
Contact service.

Gearbox too hot.
Make a safe stop.

154

Tighten fuel filler cap.

147

Time for service.

252

1) This message will be displayed approximately
600 miles (1,000 km) before the next scheduled
service is due, or when 365 days have elapsed
since the last service. The message should be
cleared at the time of that service (see the Saab
Warranties & Service Record Booklet).
This message can also be deleted by first briefly
pressing the CLR button, then depressing it a
second time for at least eight seconds until
”SERVICE” appears on the display and a chime
sounds. The message can only be deleted when
it is shown on the SID.
*) 9-5 SportCombi: the high-mounted stop light is
not included in the autocheck of lights.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 72 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Instruments and controls

NIGHT PANEL
To improve night-driving conditions inside
the car, the Night Panel mode can be
selected. In this mode, the amount of information displayed is reduced, and only the
most important instruments and displays
will be illuminated.
When the NIGHT PANEL button is pressed,
only the speedometer will be illuminated, all
the other instruments illumination being
extinguished and their needles moved to
zero. The SID display will be extinguished
and the backlighting for switches and other
controls will be dimmed. Note: All indicator
and warning lights, together with the display
of CHECK messages, will operate as normal, except ”Outdoor temperature”, see
page 68.

The following conditions will wake up the
respective displays in the Night-Panel
mode:
• Setting of the Audio system or, SID (display comes on for ten seconds).
• CHECK message generated in the SID.
• High engine revs cause the rev counter to
be illuminated until the engine speed has
fallen again.
• If the quantity of fuel remaining falls below
4 gallons (15 liters), the fuel gauge will be
illuminated.
• If the engine temperature rises above normal, the temperature gauge will be illuminated.
• In cars with automatic transmission, if the
selector lever is moved from D to position
M or L, the selector indication on the main
instrument panel will be illuminated.
To restore the displays and lighting to the
normal mode, press the NIGHT PANEL button.

Units and language versions
The SID has four sets of units:
METRIC US

IMPERIAL

miles

km/h

mph

liters

US gal

gallon

°C

°F

°C

°F

24-hour 12-hour

12-hour 12-hour

CHECK messages can be displayed in six
language options: English, Swedish,
German, French, Italian and Spanish.

Selecting units and language
1 Switch off the engine.
2 Briefly press i/SETbutton. Repeat this
until LANGUAGE/UNITS is displayed.
3 Hold i/SET depressed until a chime
sounds. Then select language using
or
.
4 Briefly press the i/SET button. Then
select the units using
or
.
5 Briefly press the i/SET button.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 73 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Instruments and controls

Switches
1

Parking lights
The parking lights can be switched on
regardless of the position of the ignition
switch. Do not use parking lights when driving.
If the parking lights are on and the driver´s
door is opened, a reminder to turn them off
will sound.
Note: The lighting switch must be in parking
light or headlight position (low beam position only) to operate the fog lights (see
page 76).

Light switches

Headlights
The headlights come on automatically when
the ignition is ON and go off when the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position.
The parking lights, however, can be on
when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position.

In cold and damp weather, the inside of
the headlamp lens may temporarily mist
up. This misting does not affect the function or service life of the light fitting.
When the lamps are on, the mist will
eventually disappear.

IB4122

The parking lights and daytime running
lights come on automatically when the ignition switch is ON.
Note to owners in the U.S.: If you do not
want Daytime Running Lights, this feature
can be disconnected: switch off the engine
and remove fuse No. 35 (see page 218).
Note to owners in Canada: Daytime Running Lights must not be disconnected as
they are a Canadian Federal legal requirement.

IB3854

Daytime running lights

1 High beam signal
2 High/low beam switching

High/low beam
To switch between high and low beam, pull
the control stalk fully towards you
(position 2). When the high beam is on, the
indicator on the main instrument panel will
be illuminated.

High beam flasher
The headlights come on to high beam when
the stalk is pulled to the first spring-loaded
position (position 1) and remain on until the
stalk is released.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 74 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Instruments and controls

Courtesy Headlight Feature
A delay function allows the headlights to
remain on low beam for about 30 seconds
after the driver’s door has been closed.
To activate this function,

In poor visibility, avoid following the tail
lights of the vehicle in front of you. If the
vehicle stops suddenly, you may be
unable to avoid a crash and therefore risk
injury to yourself and others.

IB3855

• Switch off the ignition and remove the key
• Open the driver’s door
• Pull the high/low beam control stalk
towards the steering wheel like you are
flashing the high beam, see page 73. The
low beam headlights will now come on
immediately after the driver’s door has
been closed (within 30 seconds) and will
remain on for about 30 seconds.
The length of time for this function can be
adjusted by your authorized Saab dealer.

WARNING

Rear fog light

Rear fog light
Press the button to switch on the rear fog
light, which will only come on if the headlights are on.
The rear fog light will go off automatically
when the engine is switched off. When the
fog light is next needed, it will have to be
switched on manually again.
The rear fog light consists of one light so it
is not be mistaken for brake lights.
Make sure you are familiar with the applicable provincial/state law regarding the
use of rear fog lights.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 75 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Instruments and controls

Instrument illumination

To switch on the turn signals/lane change
indicators, move the stalk up or down.
The stalk has fixed positions for indicating a
right or left turn, and the indicators are cancelled automatically (stalk returns to off
position).
The stalk also has an intermediate,
spring-loaded position that is useful for signalling when changing lanes or passing.
The respective indicator lights on the instrument panel flash at the same frequency as
the direction indicators.

1
0
2
IB4126

IB3856

Turn signal and lane change
indicators

Turn signal and lane change indicators
1 Right indicators
2 Left indicators

Instrument illumination
The brightness of the instrument illumination can be varied by means of the dimmer
switch adjacent to the headlight switch.
(See also Night panel on page 72).
In daylight or other equally bright light, the
instrument and switch illumination is automatically extinguished.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 76 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Instruments and controls

Front fog lights 3
The front fog lights can be activated in both
low beam headlight and parking light positions. Fog lights should only be used in poor
visibility conditions.
Make sure you are familiar with the applicable provincial/state law regarding the
use of fog lights.

IB3859

IB3858

WARNING

Hazard warning lights

Hazard warning lights
When this button is pressed, all the turn
signal indicators and a symbol in the button
flash simultaneously. If the ignition is on,
both indicator lights on the instrument panel
will also flash.
If the hazard warning lights are left on for
some time, the flasher frequency will be
reduced to save the battery.
Hazard warning lights should only be used
if the car constitutes a hazard to other road
users.

Switch on the hazard flashers if the car
has to be left at the roadside on account
of a crash, engine trouble or a puncture.
If you carry a warning triangle or flares,
they should be set up along the side of the
road 300 ft. (100 m) behind your vehicle.
If the car is not clearly visible (e.g. over
the brow of a hill or bridge), place the triangle/flare even further back.

Reversing lights
The reversing lights come on automatically
when reverse gear is engaged or selected
with the ignition switched on.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 77 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Instruments and controls

Wipers and washers

There are three intermittent wiper positions.
Moving the control stalk to the
spring-loaded position between 0 and 2 will
produce a single sweep of the wipers.
The wipers are designed for optimal cleaning at all driving speeds. At higher speeds,
it may be possible to detect a slight ”sweeping” sound. This may be due to the
increased air pressure on the blades at
higher speeds.

4 0
2

0
1
2
3
4

IB359

IB569

Headlight washers 3
If low beam is on, the headlights are washed
every fifth time the windshield washers are
used or if 2 minutes have elapsed since the
windshield was last washed. The headlight
washers cannot be activated separately.
The headlight washers are of the high-pressure type, which means that other parts of
the car may become wet if you activate the
washers while the car is stationary.

OFF
Intermittent operation
Low speed
High speed
Washers

Rain sensing w ipers 3
WARNING
Turn the rain sensor off if the ignition is
ON when clearing snow and ice from the
windshield, to avoid personal injury.

NOTICE
To avoid damaging the windshield wipers, turn the rain sensor off before washing the car in an automatic carwash.

Control for setting wiper delay
1 Long delay
2 Short delay

The rain sensor automatically controls the
windshield wipers. The sensor is located on
the windshield beside the rearview mirror.
The system varies between single sweeps
of the windshield and continuous wiping
depending on how much water or snow
there is on the windshield.
Activate the system by lifting the control
stalk to position 1. The wipers make one
sweep for reference to see how much water
and snow is on the windshield. In future, the
sensor compares the amount of water and
snow on the windshield with this reference
value.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 78 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Instruments and controls

When the engine has been switched off,
the control stalk must be moved to position 0 and back to position 1 to reactivate
the sensor.
Set the sensitivity using the control on the
wiper stalk (the same control as used for
wiper delay on cars not fitted with a rain sensor). The sensor has three sensitivity settings. It is most sensitive when in the uppermost position (1). When a higher degree of
sensitivity is selected, the wipers make one
sweep of the w indshield for reference.
The rain sensor has a daylight and a night
time mode. The sensor measures the
amount of available light and automatically
selects the appropriate mode. The sensor is
more sensitive at night. The function of the
rain sensor is impaired by dry snow.

Rear-window wiper
(SportCombi) 3

The rear-window wiper and washer are
operated with the same stalk switch as used
for washing and wiping the windshield and
headlights.
This stalk has two additional switches,
ON/OFF and
.
The ON position provides intermittent wiping.
The
position provides washing and
wiping. After a few sweeps the wiper stops
or reverts to intermittent wiping, if this has
been chosen. About 15 seconds after completion of the washing/wiping of the rear
window, the wiper makes a single sweep to
wipe away any remaining washer fluid.
A spring-loaded position between the OFF
and ON positions allows for a single sweep
of the rear-window wiper.
Intermittent wiping of the rear window
occurs when reverse gear is engaged if the
windshield wipers are in position 1, 2 or 3,
see page 77.

IB1207

Rear-window wiper
1 Intermittent wiping
2 Washers

95_U S_M 07.book Page 79 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Instruments and controls

The ACC system automatically works to
maintain the desired temperature inside the
car.
The system will achieve the desired temperature in the quickest possible way. Note that
selecting a higher or lower temperature than
that desired will not speed up the process.
For the ACC system to be most effective, all
windows (and moonroof 3) should be
closed.
Fresh air for the cabin is drawn in through an
inlet grille adjacent to the bottom edge of the
windshield. The air flows through a filter
upstream of the ACC system before delivery to the cabin. Cabin air is evacuated via
openings in the rear parcel shelf and then
through outlets on either side of the car
behind the rear bumper.

ACC panel
1
2
3
4
5

Temperature setting: LH side
AUTO: All settings selected automatically
Manual setting of fan speed
Manual setting of air distribution
Temperature setting: RH side

The incoming air is treated in three stages:
first it passes through a filter; it is then dehumidified and cooled and, finally, if required,
heated.
The filter is a combined particle and charcoal filter. It is so efficient that levels of noxious substances such as benzene and toluene are also reduced.

7
6
7
8
9
10

IB3860

Automatic climate
control (ACC)

Recirculation: ON/OFF
Rear-window heating: ON/OFF
A/C compressor: ON/OFF
Ventilated front seats 3
Heated front seats 3

To reduce the likelihood of misting on the
insides of the windows, the glass should be
cleaned with a quality window cleaner. How
often this will need to be done depends on
how clean the air is – if there are smokers in
the car, cleaning will need to be done more
frequently.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 80 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Instruments and controls
The system has five sensors:

Outdoor temperature sensor
Interior temperature sensor
Sun sensor (mounted on top of the fascia)
Two blended-air temperature sensors
(mounted inside the front floor vents)
Note: If anything is placed over the sun sensor, the ACC system will not function properly.
IB362

•
•
•
•

Panel vent

Panel vents

IB3861

1 Interior-temperature sensor
2 Sun sensor

The panel vents swivel in all directions so
that air can be directed as desired. In winter,
for instance, the outer vents can be directed
onto the door windows for enhanced
demisting.
The flow of air through the panel vents can
be controlled individually for each vent by
means of the adjacent control. The climate
control system works best if the panel vents
are open. If you find the air cold or that it is
drafty, start by directing the air away from
the body. If the center vent is aimed up, it will
cool the interior temperature sensor and
you may need to adjust ACC up or down,
depending upon temperature desired.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 81 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Instruments and controls
Temperature control

IB369

The cabin is divided into two temperature
zones:

Air vent at rear side window

• The driver’s zone
• The passenger zone (front and rear
seats)
The desired temperature can be set
between 60 and 80°F.
The displayed temperature is not the absolute temperature but corresponds to the
comfort level normally experienced at that
temperature after allowance has been
made for the air flow, relative humidity, solar
radiation, etc., currently prevailing inside
the car.
• The most usual temperature setting is
64–76°F, depending on personal preference and what clothing is worn.
• To allow the system time to adjust,
changes in the temperature setting shall
only be made in steps of 2°F.
Once the desired climate has been
achieved, the rear center vents can be
closed to prevent warm air being distributed
at face height.
When the ignition is switched off, only the
temperature control affects the system the
next time the engine is started. The system
will warm up/cool down to the temperature
to which the control is set.

MAX heat, red indication
The MAX heat setting is obtained by turning
the temperature control to the first position
past 80 (to the red LED). The driver’s side
selection regulates air distribution and recirculation status. Temperature, however, can
be adjusted on the passenger side.
Settings when MAX heat is selected:
• Maximum heat
• Air distribution to windshield and floor
• Recirculation OFF (even if manually
selected before)
• Fan: high speed
MAX cooling, blue indicator
The MAX cooling setting is obtained by turning the temperature control to the first position past 60 (to the blue LED). The driver’s
side selection regulates air distribution and
recirculation status. Temperature, however,
can be adjusted on the passenger side.
Settings when MAX cooling is selected:
• Maximum cooling (A/C compressor will
run even if AC OFF manually selected
before)
• Air distribution through panel vents
• Fan: maximum speed
• Recirculation ON

95_U S_M 07.book Page 82 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Instruments and controls

Functions
Pressing AUTO will cancel all manual settings.
If a manual function is selected, it will be locked in but other functions
will be controlled automatically.
The selected temperature is always maintained automatically.
Temperature, air distribution, fan speed and recirculation will be controlled automatically.
Pressing AUTO once will cancel all previous manual
selections.
The ACC system is in AUTO mode when the engine
is started.
A/C compressor OFF.
No cooling of inlet air. Temperature, air distribution
and fan speed still under automatic control.

Turn the fan control anticlockwise until "OFF" lights
up.
ACC system OFF.
Fan OFF.
A/C compressor OFF.
Air distribution selections locked in current settings.
Recirculation can be selected manually.
Heating 3 and ventilation 3 of the front seats is deactivated.
Pressing the AUTO button will put the system into
automatic mode.
Reactivation by turning the fan control clockwise one
click causes the system to resume any manual selections.

The rear window and door mirror heating is controlled
manually.
Deactivate the heating as soon as the rear window is
clear of ice and misting to avoid imposing a heavy load
on the battery longer than necessary. Note, however,
that heating will deactivate automatically after a set
time, depending on the outside temperature.
The ACC system can be programmed to activate heating automatically when outside temperature is below
+5 °C and the temperature inside the car is below
+10 °C. See page 85.
Turn the fan control to increase fan speed.
If fan speed 0 is selected, the A/C compressor will be
disengaged and the indicator on the AC OFF button
will illuminate.
Recirculation is controlled automatically to optimize
cooling although it can also be switched on and off
manually.
Recirculation does not appreciably change the air
quality but it can be useful to switch it on to avoid
unpleasant smells from entering the cabin.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 83 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Instruments and controls

One press: When the defroster is chosen manually,
all the windows (except the rear side windows,
where the air flow is off) are demisted by:

Defroster and floor vents

The defroster function remains active until another
selection is made. Note, however, that rear window/door mirror heating will deactivate automatically after a set time, depending on the outside
temperature.
Two presses: Air is directed to the windscreen
without the fan speed being increase or the rear
window heating being switched on.
To revert to a previous setting, press the AUTO
button.

IB3864

Fan: high speed.
The air is directed to the defroster vents.
Temperature increases somewhat.
Recirculation OFF.
Activation of rear window/door mirror heating.
Floor vents and rear side windows

IB3865

•
•
•
•
•

IB3863

IB3862

Air distribution

Floor and panel vents

95_U S_M 07.book Page 84 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Instruments and controls

IB3866

Panel (and center rear vent)
Starting in cold weather
To start with, the system will automatically select the defroster setting, maximum heat and low fan speed.
As the engine warms up, air will also be distributed through the floor
vents and the fan speed will be increased.
As the temperature inside the car nears the selected value, both the
fan speed and the heat will be decreased to a level determined by
the system.
Starting in hot weather
The system will automatically distribute air through the panel vents
at high fan speed and will switch on the A/C compressor (unless the
AC OFF switch has been pressed).
If the outdoor temperature is above 77°F (25°C), the system might
select recirculation after 0-15 seconds if this is required in order to
reach the desired temperature.
As the temperature inside the car nears the selected value, the fan
speed will be decreased to a value determined by the system.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 85 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Instruments and controls
Adaptation of ACC
It is also possible to customize the ACC system, e.g. to adapt to
driving and weather conditions.
Function

Operation in AUTO mode
after adaptation

Adaptation and restoration of factory settings is done by holding
the respective button depressed approx. 2 seconds until a chime
sounds.
Make sure the ignition is ON.

Factory setting
Function

The rear window heating will Heating is selected
come on after the engine has manually.
started if the outside temperature is below +5 °C.
– This function helps to prevent ice or mist forming on
the rear window in cold,
damp weather. Fuel consumption may increase
slightly.
Seat heating comes on if the
system determines that
heating is necessary based
on the temperature in the
seat and the outside temperature.

There are two settings
for heating. Repeatedly pressing the button switches between
low output, high output
and off.

Display text in SID Display text in SID when
during adaptation factory settings are
restored
ACC:AUTO
RDEFR CTRL

ACC:MANUAL
RDEFR CTRL

ACC:AUTO
SEAT HEATING

ACC:MANUAL
SEAT HEATING

Example: If you want the ACC system to handle activation and deactivation of rear window/door mirror heating, hold the
button
depressed approx. 2 seconds until a chime sounds.
The display shows:
ACC:AUTO
RDEFR CTRL
When “Adaptation of ACC“ is done, it will apply until factory settings
are restored.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 86 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Instruments and controls

Calibration

Condensation water

Calibration is carried out automatically after
a certain number of starts if the ignition has
been switched off for more than 2 hours.
If the battery has been disconnected or has
run flat, the system will need to be recalibrated.
Calibration is started manually as follows:
1 Start the engine.

When the A/C system is running, the intake
air is dehumidified, and the resultant condensation is drained off through two outlets
underneath the floor of the car, in the vicinity
of the front doors.
It is therefore perfectly normal for water to
be seen dripping from these outlets when
the car is parked. The warmer the ambient
air and the higher the humidity, the more
condensation water will form.

2 Press
and
at the same
time.
When manual calibration starts,
” ACC:CALIBR.
STARTED”
appears in SID.
Calibration takes approx. 30 seconds.

Formation of ice and mist in
extreme weather conditions

Useful tips
(before taking the car to a workshop. We
recommend that you contact an authorized
Saab workshop.)
• If the battery has been disconnected or
has run flat, the system will need to be
recalibrated. See "Calibration" above.
• If front seat heating and/or rear window
heating do not function satisfactorily, see
"Adaptation of ACC" on page 85.

It is only in the most extreme conditions that
icing and misting of window glass are likely
to be a problem, e.g. in torrential rain or
severe cold coupled with high relative
humidity, or when passengers are perspiring heavily or wearing wet clothes.
The following measures are recommended
if such problems should occur:
1 Select AUTO and 21 °C for both temperature zones.
2 Select Defroster.
If this is not enough...
3 Increase the fan speed.
If this is not enough...
4 Select a higher temperature.
The following measures are recommended
if the occupants feel that it is cold and
draughty in the car:

1 Make sure that all the air vents are fully
open, including the center rear vent. If
this is not enough...
2 Direct the air flow away from the body. If
this is not enough...
3 Raise the temperature setting a degree
or two. If this is not enough...
4 Lower the fan speed.
Troubleshooting and care, see page 243.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 87 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

IB407

IB3836

IB3837

Instruments and controls

Heated front seats 3

Ventilated front seats 3

Heated rear seat cushion 3

The heating of the seat cushion and backrest of both front seats is adjustable and
thermostat-controlled.
The heating is adjustable in two stages.

Ventilated front seats, that enhance seating
comfort in hot weather, are available as an
option on cars equipped with leather-upholstered and electrically adjustable seats.
Ventilated seats are equipped with two fans
that extract the moist air from between the
seat and the body.
The fans have two speeds.

Electrically heated seat cushions for the two
outer seats in the back are available as an
option.
The ON/OFF control button for the cushion
heating is located on the back of the center
console.
How long the cushions are heated for
depends on the outside temperature. The
heating can also be turned off with the
button.
The button has an integral indicator that is
illuminated when the heating is on.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 88 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Instruments and controls

(This page has been left blank.)

95_U S_M 07.book Page 89 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Saab 9-5 Audio System

IB4469

Radio _______________
CD player ____________
CD changer 3 ________
MP3 player ___________
Portable player 3 _____
General functions _____
Sound system ________
Technical data ________
Antennas ____________
Error codes __________
Security lock _________

3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars
(can depend on model variant, engine variant,
market specification, options or accessories).

93
99
100
102
104
105
107
108
109
112
112

95_U S_M 07.book Page 90 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Saab 9-5 Audio System

Saab 9-5 Audio
System 3
To get the best out of your Saab 9-5 Audio
System, we recommend that you read
through this entire section.
The Saab 9-5 Audio System consists of a
head unit with radio, CD player/CD
changer 3 for CD and MP3 discs and CD
changer 3 in the luggage compartment.
The audio system is operated using the
steering wheel controls 3 or the control
panel buttons.
IB3782

WARNING

Safety first!
Cut off power immediately and contact
your Saab dealer if the system begins to
emit smoke or smells strange.
All work on the audio system must be carried out
by a workshop. We recommend that you contact
an authorized Saab dealer.

Audio system
activation/deactivation.
Volume adjust.

Information on artist, album
and song title. Display of radio
text.

The tone control is used to
adjust tone and speaker settings, change CD track or MP3
file and manual adjust radio
frequency.

Setup menu.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 91 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Saab 9-5 Audio System
Activate radio and change frequency band (AM,FM and
XMTM 3).

The menu option in the display
is selected with the corresponding pushbutton directly
underneath.

Auto tuning down and change
track/file going back in order of
play on CD or MP3 disc.

No function on U.S./CA cars.

Auto tuning up and change
track/file forward in order of
play on CD or MP3 disc.

Select XMTM 3 program type
when the radio is in the
XMTM 3 mode.

Manual tuning and rapid play
back for a track/file on a CD or
MP3 disc.

Cars with CD changer 3:
insert CD or MP3 disc or discs.

Manual tuning and rapid play
forward for a track/file on a CD
or MP3 disc.

Cars without CD-changer 3:
set time and date.
Eject CD or MP3 disc.

Activate CD media or portable
player.

Steering wheel controls 3
l

IB3935

Scroll among preset pages.

"arrow up"/"arrow down":
change preset for radio stations,
change track on CD or MP3
player.
"Seek UP": auto tuning up, select
next track on CD or MP3 disc.
Activate radio station scan
SRC: press to switch between
AM, FM, XMTM 3, CD, MP3,
CD changer or portable player.
VOL: adjust volume.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 92 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Saab 9-5 Audio System

Switching the audio
system On/Off

Audio settings

The audio system will come on:

Volume
Turn the ON/OFF control until the desired
volume is obtained.

• When the ignition is switched ON and/or
the ON/OFF control is pressed.

Tone controls

ON/OFF control

The audio system will be
switched off:
• When the ON/OFF control is pressed.
• When the ignition key is removed.
• One hour after the ignition was switched
OFF, if the ignition key has not been
removed.
• 1 hour after the audio system has been
switched on if the key is not in the ignition
switch.

Tone and speaker settings
Manual tone and speaker settings
1 Press the tone control to open the menu
for tone and speaker settings.
2 Press the pushbutton under the desired
tone/speaker setting.
3 Adjust the selected setting by turning
the tone control. The selected settings
can also be adjusted by pressing the
SEEK, FWD or REV button.
Centering tone and speaker settings
Hold the tone control depressed until a
chime sounds to center all tone and speaker
settings.

Automatic tone setting
You can choose to automatically adapt tone
setting, A uto EQ (Equalizer), to the tuned
station or disc being played.
1 Press the tone control to open the menu
for tone settings.
2 Press the pushbutton under the menu
option A uto EQ label.
3 Press the pushbutton under the desired
tone setting.
4 The tone settings menu automatically
returns to the previous menu within
5 seconds.

Auto EQ menu

95_U S_M 07.book Page 93 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Saab 9-5 Audio System

Radio

Tuning a station

Press the RADIO BAND button to return to
radio mode if another audio source is in use.

Fine tuning
Turn the tone control one increment or
press the REV or FWD button to fine-tune
the frequency in increments of 0.2 MHz.

Selecting a radio station
Selecting a frequency band
Press the RADIO BAND button to change
frequency band. The selected frequency
band appears on the display.
Selecting a preset station
Scroll to the desired preset page by pressing the FAV button and then pressing the
pushbutton (1-6) under the desired preset
station.
You can also press
or
on the steering
wheel to select another preset station.

Automatic tuning
Press one of the SEEK buttons or the
button on the steering wheel for automatic
seek tuning. The radio then searches
upward in the frequency band for the nearest strong station and stops at that frequency.
Manual tuning
Turn the tone control or hold the REV or
FWD button depressed to seek a frequency
manually. Release the control/button to
stop at the desired frequency.
Scanning radio stations
Hold one of the SEEK buttons or the
button on the steering wheel depressed
until a chime sounds for a 5 second sampling of each station accessible on the frequency band.
appears on the
display.

Scanning..

Press one of the SEEK buttons or the
button on the steering wheel again to cancel
the scan and select the radio station being
played at that instant.

Storing presets
You can store up to 36 radio stations as presets by using the 6 pushbuttons under the
display and the FAV button. Press the FAV
button to scroll through up to 6 pages with
6 presets per page. Each page can contain
a combination of AM, FM and XMTM 3
stations.
Storing the current station as a preset
To store the current station as a preset:
1 Press the FAV button until you come to
the preset page (1-6) at which the station is to be stored.
2 Hold the pushbutton depressed under
the spot (1-36) at which the station is to
be stored. A chime will sound once the
station is stored.

Preset stations

95_U S_M 07.book Page 94 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Saab 9-5 Audio System

Number of pages with preset stations
To display the number of pages (1-6) with
preset stations:
1 Hold the FAV button depressed or press
the MENU button and then press the
pushbutton under the menu option
FA V 1-6.

Setup menu
2 Select the number of preset pages to be
displayed by pressing the pushbutton
under the menu option with the desired
number of preset pages (1-6).

Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has a Radio Data System
(RDS). RDS features are available for use
only on FM stations that broadcast RDS
information. With RDS, the radio can do the
following:
• Display radio station name.
• Display messages from radio stations.
• This system relies on receiving specific
information from these stations and will
only work when the information is available. In rare cased, a radio station may
broadcast incorrect information that will
cause the radio features to work
improperly. If this happens, contact the
radio station.
The RDS system is always on. When information is broadcast from the FM station you
are listening to, the station name or call letters will be displayed on the display.

Number of preset pages

RDS menu

NOTICE
The menu options AF and REG have no
function on US/CA cars.

Rolling advertisements
Some radio stations present rolling advertisements in the display.
• To block rolling advertisements, mark
PS-Freeze by pressing the pushbutton
directly underneath.
• To allow rolling advertisements, deselect
PS-Freeze by pressing the pushbutton
directly underneath.
Press the pushbutton under the arrow
symbol or wait until the system automatically returns to the previous menu.
Radio text
Press the ibutton to show text messages
sent by certain radio stations in the display.
If there are no text messages,
appears on the display.

No Info

95_U S_M 07.book Page 95 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Saab 9-5 Audio System
XMTM 3 Satellite Radio Service
XMTM is a satellite radio service based in
the 48 contiguous United States and Canada. XMTM offers a large variety of coastto-coast channels including commercial
free music, news, sports, talk, traffic/
weather (U.S. subscriders), and children‘s
programming.
XMTM provides digital quality audio and text
information that includes song title and artist
name.
A service fee is required in order to receive
the XMTM service. For more information,
contact XMTM :
In the US. at www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
In Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).
When XMTM is active, the channel name,
and number, song title and artist can be displayed.

Finding a XMTM 3 station

Remove an XMTM 3 category
TM

The PTY button is used to find XM
stations when the radio is in the XMTM
mode. To find XMTM channels within a
desired category, perform the following:
1 Press the RADIO BAND button until the
XMTM frequency is displayed. Press the
PTY button to display the category
labels on the radio display. Continue
pressing the PTY button until the
desired category name is displayed.
2 Press either of the two pushbuttons
below the desired category label to
immediately tune to the first XMTM station associated with that category.
3 Turn the tone control, press the buttons
below the right or left arrows displayed,
or press the right or left SEEK buttons to
go to the next or previous XMTM station
within the selected category.
4 To exit the category search mode, press
the FAV button to display your favorites
again.

Undesired XMTM categories can be
removed through the Setup menu. To
remove an undesired category, perform
the following:
1 Press the MENU button to display the
radio Setup menu.
2 Press the pushbutton under the menu
option XM C A T.
3 Turn the tone control to display the category you wish to remove.
4 Press the pushbutton under the menu
option R em ove until the category name
along with the word
appears
on the display.
5 Repeat the steps to remove more categories.

Removed

NOTICE
The menu option XM C A T can only be
accessed when the vehicle is stationary.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 96 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Saab 9-5 Audio System

Restore removed XMTM 3 categories
Removed categories can be restored by
pressing the pushbutton under the menu
option A dd when a removed category is displayed or by pressing the pushbutton under
the menu option R estore A ll.

The XM Categories
Decades

World

Country

Classical

Hits

Kids

Christian

News

Rock

Sports

Urban

Comedy

Jazz & Blues

Talk & Variety

Dance

Premium

Latin

95_U S_M 07.book Page 97 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Saab 9-5 Audio System

XMTM 3 Radio Messages
Radio Display Message Condition

Action Required

XM Updating

Updating encryption code

The encryption code in the receiver is being updated an no action is required.
This process should take no longer than 30 seconds.

No XM signal

Loss of signal

The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a location that is blocking
the XMTM signal. When you move into an open area, the signal should return.

Loading XM

Acquiring channel audio
(after four second delay)

The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and text data. No action is
needed. This message should disappear shortly.

Channel Off Air

Channel not in service

This channel is not currently in service. Tune in to another channel.

Channel Unavail

Channel no longer
available

This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned. Tune to another station.
If this station was one of the presets, choose another station for that preset button.

No Artist Info

Artist Name/Feature not
available

No artist information is available at this time on this channel. The system is working properly.

No Title Info

Song/Program Title not
available

No song title information is available at this time on this channel. The system is
working properly.

No CAT Info

Category Name not
available

No category information is available at this time on this channel. The system is
working properly.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 98 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Saab 9-5 Audio System

Radio Display Message Condition

Action Required

Not Found

No channel available for the There are no channels available for the selected category. The system is working
chosen category
properly.

No Information

No Text/Informational
message available

No text or informational messages are available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.

XM Theftlocked

Theft lock active

The XMTM receiver in the vehicle may have previously been in another vehicle.
For security purposes, XMTM receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If
this message is received after having your vehicle serviced, check with your Saab
dealer.

XM Radion ID

Radio ID label (channel 0)

If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the XMTM Radio eight digit
radio ID label. This label is needed to activate the service.

Unknown

Radio ID not known (should If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there nay be a receiver fault.
only be if hardware failure) Consult with your Saab dealer.

Check XM Receiver

Hardware failure

If this message does not clear within a short period of time, the receiver may have
a fault. Consult with your Saab dealer.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 99 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Saab 9-5 Audio System

CD player
NOTICE
Do not use CDs with labels or stickers.
These labels could detach and cause the
audio system to malfunction.
Activate the CD player by inserting a disc or
by pressing the CD AUX button if a CD is
already loaded.

CD player menu

Loading CDs
Insert the disc in the slot with the text side
up until the mechanism loads the disc. The
first track is played. If the disc is
wrong-side-up, it will be ejected automatically.
Once all the tracks have been played, the
CD player will restart from track 1.
The CD player is turned off by pressing
ON/OFF to turn off the audio system or by
selecting another audio source.

Removing CDs

Rapid playing tracks

Press the EJECT button to eject the CD. If
you press EJECT without removing the
ejected disc, the player will reload the disc
after 10 seconds for reasons of safety.

To rapid play the current track, hold REV or
FWD depressed. Release the button to stop
rapid play and return to normal playback.

Selecting and changing tracks

You can allow the CD player to choose
tracks randomly, i.e. not to play the tracks in
numerical order.
• To play tracks randomly, press the pushbutton under the menu option R D M .
• To resume playing tracks in numerical
order, press the pushbutton under the
menu option R D M again.

Turn the tone control or press the SEEK buttons to select or change to the preceding or
next track. The track number appears in the
display.
If the current track has played for at least
10 seconds, you can start the track from the
beginning by pressing SEEK (arrow left).
If you press SEEK (arrow right) while the
last track of the disc is playing, the first track
will play.
If you press SEEK (arrow left) while the first
track of the disc is playing, the last track will
play.
The same function applies to
the steering wheel.

and

Random playback

95_U S_M 07.book Page 100 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

100

Saab 9-5 Audio System

CD changer 3

Loading several CDs
The CD changer can be loaded with up to
6 discs. To load several discs in the CD
changer:

NOTICE
Do not use CD or CD-R discs with labels
or stickers. These labels could detach
and cause the audio system to malfunction.
Activate the CD changer by inserting one or
more CD/MP3 discs or by pressing the CD
AUX button if one or more discs is already
loaded.

1 Hold LOAD depressed for 2 seconds. A
chime sounds and the following appears
on the display:
2 Follow the instructions on the display to
load the discs.
3 If you do not wish to load more CDs,
press LOAD to cancel.

Please Wait

Loading CDs
Loading a CD
1 Press the LOAD button. The following
appears on the display:
2 Wait until the loading mechanism is
ready for the disc. The following appears
on the display:
3 Insert the disc in the slot with the text
side up until the mechanism loads the
disc. The following appears on the display:
If the disc is wrong-side-up, it will be ejected
automatically.

Please Wait

Insert CD

CD changer menu
The CD changer is turned off by pressing
ON/OFF to turn off the audio system or by
selecting another audio source.

Removing CDs
Removing a CD
1 Press EJECT to eject the disc. A chime
sounds and the following appears on the
display:
2 Remove the ejected disc when the following appears on the display:

Ejecting

Remove
CD
If you press EJECT without removing
the ejected disc, the player will reload
the disc after 10 seconds for reasons of
safety.
Removing several CDs
Hold EJECT depressed for 2 seconds to
remove all discs from the CD changer. A
chime sounds and the following appears on
the display:

Ejecting All

95_U S_M 07.book Page 101 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Saab 9-5 Audio System

101

Selecting and changing tracks

Selecting/changing CD

Random playback

Press the pushbuttons under the menu
option C D in the display to change CDs.
For selecting/changing MP3 folder, see
page 103.

You can allow the CD changer to choose
tracks randomly from all CDs, i.e. not to play
the tracks in numerical order.

The same function applies to
and
the steering wheel.
For selecting/changing MP3 files, see
page 102.

Selecting/changing CD

• To play tracks randomly, press the pushbutton under the menu option R D M .
• To resume playing tracks in numerical
order, press the pushbutton under the
menu option R D M again.
For random playback of MP3 files, see
page 103.

Rapid playing tracks
To rapid play the current track, hold REV or
FWD depressed. Release the button to stop
rapid play and return to normal playback.
For rapid playing an MP3 file, see page 103.

Random playback from all CDs

95_U S_M 07.book Page 102 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

102

Saab 9-5 Audio System

MP3 player
NOTICE
Do not use CD-R discs with labels or
stickers. These labels could detach and
cause the audio system to malfunction.
The audio system can play MP3 files
recorded on an CD-R disc with the following
bit speed: 32 - 320 kbps. Sound quality may
vary depending on the quality of the CD-R
disc, recording method and quality of the
recorded music.
The audio system can read and play a maximum of 50 MP3 files, 50 playlists, 10 sessions and 255 MP3 files. Discs containing
several folders, playlists, sessions and files
can be played up to the max. limit. Anything
over the max. limit will be ignored.

Activating the MP3 player

Removing MP3 discs

Activate the MP3 player by inserting a CD-R
disc with MP3 files into the slot or by pressing the CD AUX button if a disc with MP3
files is already loaded.
The first file in the first playlist on the disc is
played and the following appears on the display:

Press the EJECT button to eject the MP3
disc. If you press EJECT without removing
the ejected disc, the player will reload the
disc after 10 seconds for reasons of safety.
For removing one or more MP3 discs from
the CD changer, see page 100.

MP3 player

Loading MP3 discs
To load an MP3 disc, insert the disc in the
slot with the text side up until the mechanism loads the disc. The first MP3 file in the
first playlist of the disc will then be played.
If the disc is wrong-side-up, it will be ejected
automatically.
For loading one or more MP3 discs in the
CD changer, see page 100.

Selecting/changing MP3 file
Turn the tone control or press the SEEK buttons to select or change to the preceding or
next MP3 file in the current MP3 folder or
playlist. The MP3 file number appears in the
display.
If the current MP3 file has played for at least
10 seconds, you can start the MP3 file from
the beginning by pressing SEEK (arrow
left).
If you press SEEK (arrow right) while the
last MP3 file in a folder or playlist is playing,
the first MP3 file of the folder or playlist will
play.
If you press SEEK (arrow left) while the first
MP3 file in a folder or playlist is playing, the
last MP3 file of the folder or playlist will play.
The same function applies to
the steering wheel.

and

95_U S_M 07.book Page 103 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Saab 9-5 Audio System

103

Selecting/changing MP3 folder

Playback order

Sorting music

• Press the left pushbutton under the Folder
symbol to play the first MP3 file in the preceding MP3 folder on the disc.
• Press the right pushbutton under the
Folder symbol to play the first MP3 file of
the next MP3 folder on the disc.

Files on a CD-R disc will be played in the following order:

To play MP3 files sorted by artist or album,
press the pushbutton under the magnifying
glass in the display.
The CD player searches through the disc
and sorts files by artist and album. This
could take several minutes depending on
the number of MP3 files on the disc.
Once the sort is complete, select sort order
by pressing the pushbutton under the menu
option Sort.

Rapid playing an MP3 file
To rapid play the current MP3 file, hold REV
or FWD depressed. Release the button to
stop rapid play and return to normal playback.

Random playback of MP3 files
You can allow the MP3 player to randomly
select MP3 files, i.e. not to play the files in
numerical order.
• For random playback of MP3 files, press
the pushbutton under the menu option
RDM .
• To resume playing MP3 files in numerical
order, press the pushbutton under the
menu option R D M again.

Random playback of MP3 files

• The first MP3 file in the first playlist will be
played, followed by all files in each playlist. When the last MP3 file in the last playlist has been played, playback starts from
the beginning with the first MP3 file in the
first playlist.
• The first MP3 file in the first MP3 folder will
be played, followed by all files in each
folder. When the last MP3 file in the last
folder has been played, playback starts
from the beginning with the first MP3 file
in the first folder.

• To sort and play MP3 files by artist, press
the pushbutton under the menu option
A rtist.
• To sort and play MP3 files by album,
press the pushbutton under the menu
option A lbum .

95_U S_M 07.book Page 104 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

104

Saab 9-5 Audio System

Song title, artist name, etc.
If a disc has been recorded with ID3 data
(version 1 & 2), the song title, artist name,
album title and MP3 folder name can be
shown in the display.
1 Press the i button.
2 Press the pushbutton under the desired
menu option. The song title, artist name,
album title or MP3 folder name appears
in the display.
3 Press the pushbutton under the arrow
symbol to return to the previous menu.
File names with more than 32 characters or
four pages will be shortened.

Information menu

Portable player
WARNING
Place the portable player where it cannot
be thrown around and cause personal
injury in the event of a collision.

AUX input 3
The AUX input is located at the bottom right
of the audio system. It can be used to connect a portable unit, such as an MP3 player,
to the audio system.
Adjust the sound settings using the control
panel or the steering wheel controls. To
change tracks, fast forward, etc., use the
controls on the portable player.

AUX input at the bottom right of the audio
system

Connecting and activating a
portable player
1 Connect the unit to the audio system via
the AUX input.
2 Press the CD AUX button to activate the
portable player.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 105 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Saab 9-5 Audio System

General functions
WARNING
Adjustments should be made when the
car is stationary so that attention to traffic
is not reduced, increasing the likelihood
of an accident.

Setting time and date
Cars without CD changer
1 Press the Clock button.
2 Press the pushbutton under the menu
option you wish to change.
3 Press the pushbutton again to increase
time or date one increment at a time. You
can also adjust time and date by pressing the SEEK, FWD or REV button.

Cars with CD changer
1 Press the MENU button.
2 Press the pushbutton under the clock
symbol in the display.
3 Press the pushbutton under the menu
option you wish to change.
4 Press the pushbutton again to increase
time or date one increment at a time. You
can also adjust time and date by pressing the SEEK, FWD or REV button.

105

Time and date display
1 In the clock menu, press the pushbutton
under the arrow symbol in the display.
2 Specify whether time should be displayed with the 12-hour or 24-hour
system and in which order date is to be
indicated by pressing the pushbutton
under the desired menu option.

Time and date display
Setting time and date

NOTICE
The menu option RDS has no
function on US/CA cars.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 106 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

106

Saab 9-5 Audio System

Speed dependent volume
compensation
As vehicle speed increases, ambient noise
also increases. If you do not wish to continually adjust the volume, the audio system
can automatically adjust volume based on
an increase or decrease in vehicle speed.
Select one of four settings:
•
•
•
•

O ff(no compensation)
Low (low compensation)
M ed (medium compensation)
H igh (maximum compensation)

1 Press the MENU button.
2 Press the pushbutton under the menu
option A U TO VO LU M E .
3 Press the pushbutton under the desired
speed compensation.

Speed dependent volume compensation

95_U S_M 07.book Page 107 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Saab 9-5 Audio System

Sound system
The sound system is called harman/kardon® Sound System. Loudness is controlled automatically by the audio system,
boosting the highest and lowest frequency
ranges to enhance the sound image when
the volume is set to a low level. Sound
reproduction is therefore excellent whatever the volume setting.
The 9-5 SportCombi has 8 speakers as
there is only one subwoofer in the luggage
compartment.

harman/kardon® Sound System
The harman/kardon® Sound System
system has 9 speakers: three mounted in
the instrument panel fascia (the center
speaker further enhances the sound
image), one in each door and two subwoofers in the parcel shaft. The subwoofers
enhance reproduction of the lowest bass
notes.

107

95_U S_M 07.book Page 108 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

108

Saab 9-5 Audio System

Technical data
Tone controls
Bass_____________ ±8 dB at 100 Hz
Treble ____________ ±8 dB at 16 kHz
Power output
harman/kardon®
Sound System __ 200 W
150 W at 1% THD
and 13.5 V
Radio module
Radio system ______ PLL frequency synthesizer tuner.
Number of presets
FM/AM/XMTM 3 _ 6 x 6
Frequency range
FM ___________ 87.7 - 107,9 MHz
AM ___________ 530 - 1710 kHz

Tuning steps
Automatic tuning _

FM 200 kHz
AM 10 kHz
Manual tuning ___ FM 200 kHz
AM 10 kHz
Frequency range (FM) 40 – 11000 Hz
±1 dB
Distortion (FM) _____ < 0.5%
CD player and
CD changer
1-bit system and 8 x
oversampling
Frequency range ___ 20 – 20000 Hz
±1 dB
Distortion _________ <0.005%
Dynamics _________ >85 dB
CD changer capacity 6 discs
Specifications in accordance with EIA Interim Standard.
THD = Total Harmonic Distortion

95_U S_M 07.book Page 109 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Saab 9-5 Audio System

109

Antennas
The audio system has two antennas incorporated in the rear window: one for FM and
one for AM.

NOTICE
Refrain from placing hard or sharp
objects on the rear parcel shelf, to avoid
damaging the antenna leads.

IB4471

• Roof loads can negatively affect telecommunication, GPS reception and the performance of the XMTM system 3.
• If sun film is fitted to the rear window, it
must be a pure-plastic variety to maintain
good radio reception. Ensure that the film
does not contain any metal.

IB4470

The XMTM Satellite Radio antenna 3 is
located on the roof of the vehicle. Keep this
antenna clear of snow and ice build up for
clear radio reception.

Multipath propagation

Diversity antenna 3

Multipath propagation occurs when radio
waves from an FM transmitter are reflected
by a large building, or the like, causing them
to arrive slightly later than the direct waves.
This can create interference to radio reception. See also "Diversity antenna".

To improve radio reception when the topography is a problem, a second FM antenna,
known as a diversity antenna, can be fitted
in the rear window. Consult a Saab dealer
for further information.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 110 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

110

Saab 9-5 Audio System

IB388

IB4472

IB4496

Shadow effect

Cross modulation

Radio waves, FM/AM

Because FM radio waves travel in straight
lines from the transmitter, a shadow effect
can occur when tall buildings or hills
obstruct the propagation path from the
transmitter to the car.

If the radio is tuned to a weak transmitter in
the vicinity of a stronger one, the car’s
antennas will receive signals from both.
Such interference is apparent when the
unwanted broadcast can be heard faintly in
the background.

FM radio waves radiate in straight lines from
the transmitter. Because such waves do not
follow the curvature of the Earth, their
strength becomes weaker the further they
travel. That is why a large number of transmitters is needed to provide good reception.
AM waves, on the other hand, are reflected
off the ionosphere, thus greatly extending
their range.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 111 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

IB4474

IB4473

Saab 9-5 Audio System

Sources of FM interference

Sources of AM interference

Interference to FM reception can be caused
by the electrical systems in other vehicles,
particularly if the signal from the transmitter
is weak.

AM reception is prone to interference, e.g.
from electrical systems in other vehicles,
high-tension power lines and lightning.

111

95_U S_M 07.book Page 112 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

112

Saab 9-5 Audio System

Error codes

Security lock
WARNING

NOTICE
Proceed with care if rectifying a fault. If in
doubt, contact a workshop. We recommend that you contact an authorized
Saab dealer.
The audio system has a built-in diagnostics
function. If a fault is detected, a error code
is generated to help workshop technicians
to diagnose the fault. Below are the codes
for some faults that you might be able to rectify yourself.
Error code

Possible cause

Check CD

• CD is dirty, scratched,
loaded wrong-side-up
or defective.
• The CD may be
improperly burned.

The CD player/CD changer is classified
as Class 1 laser equipment.
• Service and repair work must only be
carried out by authorized technicians.
• If the casing is damaged, hazardous
laser radiation can occur.

NOTICE
All work on the audio system must be carried out by a workshop. We recommend
that you contact an authorized Saab
dealer.

The audio system is equipped with an electronic security lock. The special code is
unique to the car in which the audio system
is fitted.
Each time the audio system is switched on,
a check is made to ensure that the code is
correct. If not, the following will appear on
the display:
If the audio system is to be transferred to
another car (Saab 9-5), a Saab dealer must
be contacted to provide the right code for
the audio system.

Locked

95_U S_M 07.book Page 113 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Interior equipment and trunk

113

Interior equipment and trunk

IB394

Steering wheel
adjustment__________
Electric windows______
Rearview mirrors______
Moonroof 3 __________
Interior lighting _______
Sun visors ___________
Power Outlet 3 _______
Glove compartment ___
Cup holders __________
Trunk _______________

3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars
(can depend on model variant, engine variant,
market specification, options or accessories).

114
115
116
123
124
125
126
126
128
129

95_U S_M 07.book Page 114 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

114

Interior equipment and trunk

Steering wheel
adjustment
WARNING
Never adjust the steering wheel unless
the car is stationary.
IB3869

Fore-and-aft and tilt adjustment of the steering wheel is possible.
Pull down the lever fully until you hear a
click. Move the steering wheel to the desired
position and then raise the lever. The lever
should lock with a click.
Make sure that the lever is fully locked
before driving off.

Horn

IB3868

The horn is sounded by pressing the central
part of the steering wheel. Press closest to
the steering wheel rim.

To adjust the steering wheel

95_U S_M 07.book Page 115 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Interior equipment and trunk

115

Electric windows
WARNING

• The person operating the electric windows is responsible for ensuring that
no one, especially children, has their
head, hands or fingers in the window
openings, before raising the windows.
Raising the windows could otherwise
cause serious or fatal injuries.
• Do not extend your arm, head etc. out
of an open window while driving.
The electric motors of the front windows are
equipped with overload protection (integrated thermal protection). This protection
operates when the windows are wound
down automatically (switch pressed fully
down).

IB3231

Bear in mind the pinch hazard when the
side windows are being wound up.
• Always remove the ignition key when
you leave the car. This prevents personal injury caused by the electric windows, for example, due to children
playing.
1 Window switches
2 Switch for rendering rear door window switches inoperative

To open:
Front windows: press the front of the switch
Rear windows: Press the back of the switch.
The switches for the front windows have a
third position for automatic opening of the
window. Press the switch fully down to lower
the window completely.
To cancel automatic lowering of the window, lift the switch briefly.

To close:
Front windows: Lift the front of the switch.
Rear windows: Lift the back of the switch.
The actuating motor will be switched off
automatically when the window is fully
closed or when the switch is released.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 116 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Interior equipment and trunk

IB445

116

Switch for rear side window

Child safety: rear windows
(ON/OFF)

Rearview mirrors

The window switches on the rear doors can
be rendered inoperative by the ON/OFF
switch in the panel on the center console.
When the switch is ON, the rear side windows can be operated by the switch on each
rear door. The switch’s back lighting will be
activated.
When the switch is OFF, the rear side windows can only be operated from the panel
on the center console. When off, the
switch’s back lighting will also be switched
off.

Door mirrors
The door mirrors may have an auto dimming
function 3 and the passenger side door
mirror is of the wide-angle ‘‘aspheric” type.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 117 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

117

IB568

Interior equipment and trunk

Adjusting the door mirrors

Door mirror folded in

1 Select mirror
2 Use touch pad to adjust mirror

The adjusting switch is on the driver’s door.
If the car is equipped with a programmable
driver’s seat, the settings of the door mirrors
can also be stored in the preset buttons for
the seat (see page 20).

The door mirrors are designed to fold back
if knocked. They can also be fully retracted
for parking in tight spaces, such as on the
car deck of a ferry. Remember to fold them
out again before driving off.

NOTICE
The door mirrors should be fully retracted
before the car enters an automatic car
wash.

Button for angling passenger’s mirror
down when reversing
Cars equipped with a programmable
driver’s seat 3 also have the ability to angle
the passenger’s mirror down when reversing, e.g. for a better view of the curb.
1 Select reverse.
2 Press the tiny button adjacent to the
doormirror switch to tilt the mirror. The
mirror will be reset automatically when
reverse gear is deselected.
The mirror glass can also be adjusted manually by gently pressing the glass in the
desired direction.
The mirrors are heated, and the heating
comes on and goes off with the rear-window
heater.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 118 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

118

Interior equipment and trunk
Interior rearview auto-dimming
mirror with garage door opener,
and digital compass 3
WARNING

Rearview mirror
1 Day position
2 Night position

Rearview mirror
The rearview mirror has day/night positions
that can be selected by means of a knob
beneath the mirror. Adjust the mirror in day
position.

Make sure that people and objects are out
of the way of a moving door or gate to prevent potential harm or damage.
When programming the garage opener,
you may be operating a garage door or
gate operator. Therefore it is advised to
park outside of the garage.
Do not use the garage opener with any
garage door opener that lacks the safety
stop and reverse feature as required by
federal safety standards. (This includes
any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982.). A garage
door opener which cannot detect an
object, signalling the door to stop and
reverse, does not meet current federal
safety standards. Using a garage door
opener without these features increases
risk of serious injury or death.

Buttons for garage opener and compass
1-3 Garage opener
4 LED
5 Compass/auto dimming ON/OFF
6 Compass bearing

Retain your original garage door transmitter
for future programming procedures (i.e.,
new vehicle purchase). It is also suggested
that upon the sale of the vehicle, the programmed garage opener buttons be erased
for security purposes.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 119 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Interior equipment and trunk
Preparations for first-time programming
Before programming the garage opener for
the first time, you must delete any factory
codes.
Press and hold the two outer buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash-after
20 seconds. Release both buttons. Do not
hold for longer that 30 seconds. The garage
opener is now in the train (or learning) mode
and can be programmed at any time beginning with "Programming" - step 2.
Programming
The garage opener can record and store the
frequencies of three different remote controls.
The battery in the remote control should be
fairly new for programming to work well.
Do not repeat "Programming" - step two
to train additional devices to a second or
third button. Begin with "Programming" step three.
1 Turn the ignition ON.
2 Press and hold the two outer buttons
(buttons one and three) - releasing only
when the indicator light begins to flash
(after 20 seconds). Do not hold the buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do
not repeat step two to program a
second and/or third hand-held transmitter to the remaining two buttons.
3 Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 1-3 inches (5-14 cm) away from
the button you wish to program while
keeping the indicator light in view. The

transmitter should face the mirror from
below or left side of the mirror.
4 Simultaneously press and hold both the
chosen and hand-held transmitter buttons. Do not release the buttons until
step 5 has been completed.
Note: Some gate operators and garage
door openers may require you to replace
this Programming Step 4 with procedures
noted in the "Gate Operator / Canadian Programming" section.
5 After the indicator light changes from a
slow to a rapidly blinking light, release
both the mirror and hand-held transmitter buttons.
6 Press and hold the just-trained button
and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete
and your device should activate when
the button is pressed and released.
Note: To program the remaining two buttons, begin with "Programming" - step
three. Do not repeat step two.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two
seconds and then turns to a constant
light continue with "Programming"
steps 7-9 to complete the programming of
a rolling code equipped device (most commonly a garage door opener).
7 At the garage door opener receiver
(motor-head unit) in the garage, locate
the "learn" or "smart" button. This can
usually be found where the hanging

119

antenna wire is attached to the
motor-head unit.
8 Firmly press and release the "learn" or
"smart" button. (The name and color of
the button may vary by manufacturer.)
Note: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate step nine.
9 Return to the vehicle and firmly press,
hold for two seconds and release the
programmed button. Repeat the
"press/hold/release" sequence a
second time, and, depending on the
brand of the garage door opener (or
other rolling code equipped device),
repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming process.
The garage opener should now activate
your rolling code equipped device.
Note: To program the remaining two buttons, begin with "Programming" - step
three. Do not repeat step two.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 120 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

120

Interior equipment and trunk

Gate Operator / Canadian Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to "time-out" (or quit)
after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for the
garage opener to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian law,
some U.S. gate operators are designed to
"time-out" in the same manner.
If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties programming a gate operator by
using the "Programming" procedures
(regardless of where you live), replace
"Programming " step 4 with the following:
Note: If programming a garage door opener
or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the
device during the "cycling" process to prevent possible overheating.
Continue to press and hold the button while
you press and release - every two seconds ("cycle") your hand-held transmitter
until the frequency signal has successfully
been accepted by the garage opener. (The
indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly.)
Proceed with "Programming" step five to
complete.

NOTICE
Switch off the power supply to the garage
door or gate (or park the car beyond the
range of the remote control) while programming using the "cycling" method to
prevent damaging the electrical motor.

Reprogramming a single button
To program a device to the garage opener
using a button previously trained, follow
these steps:
1 Press and hold the desired button. DO
NOT release the button.
2 The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. Without releasing the button, proceed with "Programming" step 3.

Erasing the three buttons
To erase programming from the three buttons (individual buttons cannot be erased
but can be "reprogrammed" as outlined
below), follow the step noted:
• Press and hold the two outer buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash-after
20 seconds. Release both buttons. Do
not hold for longer that 30 seconds. The
garage opener is now in the train (or learning) mode and can be programmed at any
time beginning with "Programming" step 3.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 121 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Interior equipment and trunk
Opening a garage door
To operate, simply press and release the
programmed button. Activation will now
occur for the trained device (i.e. garage door
opener, gate operator, security system,
entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.).
For convenience, the hand-held transmitter
of the device may also be used at any time.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
manufacturer could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device.

121

Rearview auto-dimming
mirrors 3
The autodimming is activated and deactivated with a short push on button 2.
If the mirror is equipped with Garage Door
Opener (option) the letter 1 is displayed on
compass bearing display briefly when auto
dimming is activated. When deactivating
the letter 0 is displayed.
The interior rearview mirror has two sensors, one forward-facing and one rear-facing. They also activate and deactivate the
auto dimming feature on door mirrors.
The system is activated when the forward-facing sensor detects that it is dark
outside and the rear-facing sensor detects.
For example, if the car following has not
dimmed its headlights. The rearview mirrors
are then darkened to prevent the strong light
source from dazzling the driver. This darkening is stepless.
The mirrors return to their normal states
when the strong light source diminishes.
The auto dimming function can be turned
OFF with the switch on the lower edge of the
rear-view mirror.
NOTE
Towing a trailer can cause the system to
malfunction, as the rear-facing sensor may
sense light from the trailer.

1 Forward-facing sensor
2 ON/OFF switch, auto dimming function
3 Rear-facing sensor

95_U S_M 07.book Page 122 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

122

Interior equipment and trunk

Compass
The compass is integrated in the rearview
mirror. The compass bearing is displayed in
the top right-hand corner of the mirror and is
updated every other second. The compass
displays the car’s direction of travel: N, NE,
E, etc.
Switch the compass display on and off by
pressing button 5 for 3 seconds.

Compass zones in Canada
Changing zones
The earth’s magnetic fields vary depending
on one’s position on the globe. If you drive
your car from one magnetic zone to another
the compass setting will need to be changed
to ensure a correct bearing.
1 Study the illustrations to determine the
correct zone.
2 Press and hold button 5 until "ZONE" is
shown in the display on the mirror
(6 seconds). The zone number setting
now is also shown.
3 Press button 5 repeatedly to change the
zone number. There are 15 zones from
which to choose. Once the correct zone
is selected, release the button and wait
4 seconds. The compass will now display the bearing.

Compass zones in US
Calibration
Calibration is performed automatically
during travel. If an accessory, such as a
mobile phone, is fitted and it can be
assumed that the compass is affected, the
compass may need to be calibrated manually.
1 Press and hold button 5 until "CAL" and
the compass bearing are displayed
(approx. 9 seconds).
2 Drive in circles (max. 5 mph/8 km/h) or
drive as normal until "CAL" is no longer
displayed.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 123 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Interior equipment and trunk

123

Moonroof 3
WARNING

• The person operating the electric
moonroof is responsible for ensuring
that no one, especially children, has
their head, hands or fingers in the
opening, before closing the moonroof.
Operating the moonroof could otherwise cause serious or fatal injuries.
• Do not extend your arm, head etc. out
of an open moonroof while driving.
The moonroof is operated by the switch on
the overhead panel above the rearview mirror. The moonroof can be opened partially
or fully.
To open:
• Slide the control towards the rear to open
the moonroof to the comfort position.
To open it fully, slide the control back a
second time. Press the control to stop it
earlier.

1
2

3
IB430

Bear in mind the pinch hazard when closing the moonroof.
• Always remove the ignition key when
you leave the car. This prevents personal injury caused by the electric
moonroof, for example, due to children playing.

Moonroof control
1 To open
2 To close
3 Ventilation position

To close:
• Slide the control forwards until the moonroof is closed.
Ventilation position
• Press the middle of the control (when
moonroof closed).
• To close: slide the control forwards.
To fully open the moonroof from the ventilation position, slide the control back.
The moonroof incorporates an interior,
manual, sliding sun blind.
If the car is newly waxed, the moonroof may
creak when opened to the ventilation position or when driving with the moonroof
closed. The sound comes from the area
where the front edge of the moonroof meets

the metal roof. Open the moonroof fully and,
using washer fluid, clean the seal on the
leading edge of the moonroof and the
painted surface against which this seals
when the moonroof is closed.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 124 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

124

Interior equipment and trunk
1
2

Manual operation of moonroof

Emergency operation of
moonroof
In an emergency (e.g. if there is an electrical
failure) the moonroof can be operated by a
screwdriver. Remove the cover at the front
of the moonroof opening, insert a screwdriver in the groove, and rotate.
Rotate counterclockwise to close moonroof.

IB357

IB431

1 Interior lighting on continuously
2 Lighting comes on when a door is opened
3 Lighting always off

Interior lighting
The interior lighting consists of one dome
light in the front and one in the back, a
map-reading light in the front, two reading
lights in the back, floor courtesy lights in the
front (in some model variants) and door
courtesy lights on all doors.
The courtesy lights come on automatically
when the respective door is opened. Each
reading light has its own switch adjacent to
the lamp.

The switch for the dome lights is on the front
overhead panel. When the switch is in the
mid-position (door-activated), the interior
lighting will come on:
• When the car is unlocked from the outside.
• When any door is opened.
• When the ignition key is withdrawn from
the ignition switch.
Lighting goes out 30 seconds after the
doors have been closed or:
• when the ignition is switched ON, provided that the cabin lighting control is in
the center position
• when the car is locked with the remote
control.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 125 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Interior equipment and trunk

125

Luggage-compartment lighting
The luggage-compartment lighting comes
on automatically when the trunk is opened
and goes out when the trunk is closed.
The lighting will also be switched off automatically after 20 minutes if the trunk has
been left open.

IB358

IB1180

1 Reading lights
2 Dome light

There is also a light in the sun visors. The
light comes on when the cover over the
vanity mirror is opened.
When the ignition is OFF, if a door has been
left open for 20 minutes, the interior lighting
will be switched off automatically to save the
battery.

Sun visor

Sun visors
If the car is equipped with double sun visors.
One section of the visor can be independently pivoted to the side window.
A vanity mirror is provided on the back of the
sun visors. The vanity mirrors are illuminated when the cover is raised.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 126 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Interior equipment and trunk

Power Outlet 3
WARNING
The maximum combined load for the two
power outlets is 240 W (20 A).
You can use the electrical socket to charge
a mobile phone, for example.

Glove compartment
WARNING
The glove compartment must be closed
while travelling. An open glove compartment door could cause leg injuries in the
event of a crash.
The glove compartment can be cooled by
the air conditioning (ACC) system. Cold air
can be directed to the glove compartment
for keeping drinks cool, etc.
Slide the cover to open/close the air inlet.
Additional storage facilities are provided
(see next page).

IB1286

126

Sliding cover in glove compartment to
admit cold air

95_U S_M 07.book Page 127 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Console between front seats

Center armrest for rear seat 3

On the back of the front seats 3

IB441

On leading edge of front seats 3

IB439

In the doors

127

IB438

IB437

IB436

Interior equipment and trunk

95_U S_M 07.book Page 128 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

128

Interior equipment and trunk
WARNING

• The cup holder should not be used to
hold cups made of china, glass or hard
plastic as these can cause injury in the
event of a crash.

Cup holder in fascia
1 Press symbol to open
2 Lift bottom to close

• Avoid spillage, particularly of hot
drinks.
• Avoid putting oversized cups in the
cup holder.

IB444

IB1153

• Use only for paper cups or aluminium
cans.

Cup holder in rear armrest 3
Press the edge to open/close.

NOTICE

Cup holders are provided in the instrument
panel fascia, in the center console compartment between the front seats, and in the
rear-seat armrest (certain variants only).
To access the cup holder in the instrument
panel, press the symbol and release.
To access the cup holder in the rear seat
armrest, lower the armrest and press the
front edge of the holder. Close in the same
way.
The number of cup holders provided may
vary between models.

Take care not to spill any liquid on the
audio system, ignition switch or the like
when using the cup holders. Soft drinks in
particular can cause malfunction.

Cup holder in center console 3

IB443

Cup holders

95_U S_M 07.book Page 129 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

129

Interior equipment and trunk

Trunk
WARNING

Folding the rear seat, 9-5 Sedan
The rear seat is split and the two sections can be folded independently. Folding down of the rear seat is easier if the front seats are
not all the way back, and the rear head restraints are folded down.
1 Raise the rear seat cushions by pulling the loop located between
the cushion and the backrest.
2 Tip the seat cushion forward.
3 Press the button adjacent to the respective backrest to release it.
4 Fold down the backrest.

• Never leave a child or animal unattended in the car. During
sunny weather the temperature in the passenger and luggage
compartments can climb to 158–176°F (70–80°C). Small children are very susceptible to heat stroke.
• Rear-seat passengers should always ensure that the head
restraint is raised and in proper position for the seats to be
occupied.
• Keep hands well clear of all moving parts.
• Never place heavy objects on the rear window shelf. There is
always a danger of loose objects flying about and causing
injury if the car should brake suddenly or be involved in a
crash.
• Before folding up the backrest, hang the outer safety belts
onto the hook on the respective courtesy handle to prevent
them from becoming trapped.
• Check that the seatbelt locks do not get trapped under the
seat cushions when these are raised back up.
• Make sure that the backrest is locked when it is restored to an
upright position. Check that the back rest release button (3) is
flush with the surround before entering the rear seat. This indicates that the backrest is locked.

IB459

95_U S_M 07.book Page 130 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Interior equipment and trunk

130

WARNING

• Never overload the cargo net 3. If the elastic breaks this may
cause personal injury. Do not use a cargo net that shows signs
of wear.
• Secure heavy and bulky items using the tie down points
provided in the trunk. This will avert the danger of luggage
flying around if the car should brake suddenly or be involved
in a crash (see page 131).
• Secure small items if the backrest is folded down or the
load-through hatch is open. Small items can also be thrown
around inside the car and cause personal injury.
• Do not exceed the load capacity of the car, as this will alter its
handling characteristics (see page 258).

IB461

• Place heavy items closest to the backrest and stow smaller
and lighter items on top.

Outer safety belt hooked onto courtesy handle

• Make sure that the seat cushions and backrests are properly
secured when folding them back to their normal position.
Check that the button (item 3 on page 129) is flush with the
surround before entering the back seat.

IB4140

The tail pipe of the exhaust system can become very hot during
driving. Bear this in mind when loading and unloading the car so
that children, for example, do not burn themselves.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 131 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

131

Interior equipment and trunk

A trunk pass-through hatch is incorporated in the rear seat backrest
to enable long, narrow items to be carried inside the car.
Items should not weigh more than 33 lbs. (15 kg) nor be more than
2 yards (2 metres) in length. See the label on the hatch.
1 Fold down the armrest.
2 Raise the hatch by lifting the handle.
Before loading or unloading long items, switch off the engine and
apply the parkingbrake. This averts the danger of the car moving off
suddenly if a long item were to knock the gear or selector lever into
gear.

IB463

Trunk pass-through hatch

WARNING
• Anchor the load securely (e.g. using middle safety belt) to
avoid danger of injury resulting from displacement of load on
hard braking.
• Do not exceed the load capacity of the car, as this will alter its
handling characteristics (see page 258).

Tie Downs

IB4141

The tie downs for securing the load are fitted inside the trunk. Place
the load as far in as possible.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 132 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Interior equipment and trunk

132

Folding the rear seat, 9-5 SportCombi
Both the narrow and wide sections of the rear seat can be folded
separately. Folding is facilitated if the front seats are not located too
far back. The wide section cannot be folded separately if a cargo net
(accessory) is mounted on the rear of the backrest.

IB1211

1 Make sure that the head restraint is in the down position. For
height adjustment refer to page 21.
2 Put the safety belts for the outer seat places in their respective
belt clips, which are located near the backrest (see illustration).
3 Raise the rear seat cushions by pulling the loop located between
the cushion and the backrest.
4 Fold the narrow section (right) of the backrest forward by raising
the opening handle on the right-hand side.
5 Fold the wide section of the backrest forward in the
corresponding manner.
6 Adjust the front seats for optimal driving/passenger comfort.

NOTICE
Safety belt located in its belt clip

IB3127

The safety belts for the outer seating positions should be put in
their respective belt clips near the backrest to prevent them from
being pinched when the rear seat is raised to the upright position.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 133 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

133

Interior equipment and trunk
Parcel shelf, 9-5 SportCombi
WARNING

• Do not travel in the back seat without ensuring that the head
restraint is set at a suitable height for the seats to be occupied.
• Never allow anyone to sit on a folded backrest.
• Always be aware of the risk of pinching when handling moving
parts of the seating.
• Never place heavy objects on the parcel shelf. There is always
a danger of loose objects flying about and causing injury if the
car should brake suddenly or be involved in a crash.
• Make sure that the backrests are locked when they are folded
back upright. Check that the two red warning-indication flags
are fully down. This indicates that the backrests are locked.
• Check that the safety belt lock is not trapped under the seat
cushions when these are raised back up.
• Never leave a child or animal unattended in the car. During
sunny weather the temperature in the passenger and luggage
compartments can climb to 158–176°F (70–80°C). Small children are very susceptible to heat stroke.

Fold the parcel shelf as follows:
1 Press the rear edge of the shelf downwards and forwards.
2 Continue pressing the folded section forward until it is folded over
the front section.
Extend the parcel shelf as follows:
1 Hold the rear edge of the shelf and pull it back.
2 The shelf rests on a track located beneath the rear side windows.
Make sure that the rear corner fits in the recess. Otherwise it will
not lie flat.
Alternative location of the parcel shelf if this is removed:
• Folded up on the floor at the rear of the luggage compartment.
• On its end on the floor behind the front seat backrest.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 134 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Interior equipment and trunk

134

Folding the narrow section of the backrest

NOTICE
The safety belts for the outer seating positions should be put in
their respective belt clips near the back rest to prevent them being
pinched when the rear seat is raised to the upright position, see
illustration page 132.

IB3128

The folding is facilitated if the front seat is not too far back.
1 Make sure that the head restraint is in the down position. For
height adjustment refer to page 21.
2 Put the safety belt in the belt clip near the backrest.
3 Raise the rear seat cushion by pulling the loop located at the rear
of the cushion.
4 Fold the narrow section (right) of the backrest forward by raising
the opening handle.
5 Adjust the front seat for optimal passenger comfort.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 135 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Interior equipment and trunk
Load anchoring
WARNING
• Put heavy loads as low down and as
far forward as possible in the luggage
compartment, i.e. against the back of
the rear seat.
• Never overload the cargo net 3. If the
elastic breaks this may cause personal
injury. Do not use a cargo net that
shows signs of wear.
• Never stack cargo so high that any part
of the cargo lies above the edge of the
backrest, if a cargo guard 3 is not
being used.
• Always tie down the cargo so that it
cannot be thrown forward during
heavy braking or in the event of a
crash.
• Unsecured and heavy cargo can
increase the risk of injury during hard
braking, sudden avoidance maneuvers and in the event of a crash.
• For the best load anchoring, use the
special cargo tie down eye and load
straps 3.
• Load the cargo tie down eyes evenly.
Never attach more than one strap to
each tie down eye.

• Provide protection on sharp edges to
prevent damage to the load straps.
• Never use the elastic floor net 3 and
elastic side net (accessory) when the
rear seat is folded down. These nets
are only intended to keep light objects
tidy, not for the anchoring of loads.
• If possible, avoid having the rear seat
folded down when driving with a heavy
load because the anchoring possibilities are restricted when the rear seat is
in this position. That the rear seat is
in the upright position is a basic
requirement for protection against
cargo displacement in the event of
a crash.
• Cargo can intrude into the passenger
compartment during a sudden stop or
front crash if the outer safety belts are
not fastened. Check that the two red
warning-indication flags are fully
down. This shows that the backrests
are locked.

135

WARNING
• Match the speed and driving style
according to how the car is loaded.
The driving characteristics of the car
can be affected because the center of
gravity is altered when there is a cargo
in the luggage compartment.
• An object weighing 55 lbs. (25 kg) corresponds to a weight of 2200 lbs.
(1000 kg) in a head on crash at
32 mph (50 km/h).
• Adjust the car’s load (passengers and
luggage) so that the gross vehicle
weight or the axle weight is not
exceeded, see page 258.
Driving with the trunk lid/tailgate open,
see page 183.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 136 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Cargo tie down eye 3 mounted on the longitudinal rails 3
On the floor of the luggage compartment
there may be two longitudinal aluminium
rails (CargoTracks™) where accessory
cargo tie down eye can be mounted.
Fitting a lashing eye:
1 Hold it between your forefinger and
middle finger with the ring up.
2 Press down the spring center section
with your thumb.
3 Insert the center section into one of the
holes and move the lashing eye forward
or back slightly to fit it into the middle of
the recess in the rail.
4 Release it.
5 Check that the lashing eye is firmly fitted
by pulling on it.

Example of cargo anchoring
Items for load anchoring:
• Cargo tie down eye 3.
• Special load straps 3.
Items to keep light objects tidy 3:
• Elastic floor cargo net 3.
• Elastic side cargo net for the right-hand
side of the luggage compartment 3.
The elastic nets may only be used to keep
light objects tidy, not for anchoring.
The floor net should be attached to the
cargo tie down eye that are mounted on the
CargoTracks™. Place the tie down eyes as
far forward and as far back as possible on
the CargoTracks™.
The side netting should be attached to the
two tie down eyes which are included in the

IB1215

IB1216

Interior equipment and trunk

IB4092

136

Elastic cargo net for lighter objects.
accessory kit and to two of the eyes
mounted on the right-hand CargoTrack™
on the floor.
The cargo tie down eyes, load straps and
elastic nets are stored in the two floor lockers on the right- and left-hand side of the
luggage compartment. The lockers are
opened by lifting the respective fabric loop.

NOTICE
Do not place any objects so that the
demisting and antenna elements on the
inside of the window could be damaged.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 137 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Interior equipment and trunk

137

Cargo net 3

IB1217

The cargo in the luggage compartment
must be anchored properly, even if the
cargo net is correctly in position. The only
purpose of the net is to prevent light
objects from being thrown about in the
cabin during heavy braking or in the event
of a crash.

IB1218

WARNING

Install the net behind the rear seat backrest.

Cover over the fixing point for the cargo
net

Attaching the cargo net to the roof

You can also install the cargo net directly
behind the front seats when the rear seats
are folded.
1 Remove the front covers from the roof.
2 Fasten the attachments at the top of the
net to the two attachment points in the
roof.
3 Wrap each strap around the tube running under the rear edge of each front
seat and attach the hook to the eye on
the strap.

Hook attached to a lashing eye

IB4091

1 Remove the rearmost covers from the
roof.
2 Fasten the attachments at the top of the
net to the two attachment points in the
roof.
3 Secure a lashing eye furthest forward on
each of the CargoTracks (see previous
page). Attach the hooks on the net to
these eyes. Tension the straps.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 138 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

138

Interior equipment and trunk
Trunk Release Handle
There is a glow-in-the-dark trunk release
handle located inside the trunk on the latch.
This handle will glow following exposure to
light. Pull the release handle down to open
the trunk from the inside.

Storage tray 3 under luggage
compartment floor,
9-5 SportCombi
Secure the luggage compartment floor in
the open position using the hook on the
underside of the floor. The storage tray must
be located under the luggage compartment
floor. The cargo net can be stored here
when not in use for example.
Maximum recommended weight on the
storage tray is 22 lbs. (10 kg).

The trunk release handle was not
designed to be used to tie down the trunk
lid or as a an anchor point when securing
items in the trunk. Improper use of the
trunk release could damage it.

IB1833

IB4093

NOTICE

Trunk Release Handle

95_U S_M 07.book Page 139 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Starting and driving

139

IB3878

Starting and driving

3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars
(can depend on model variant, engine variant,
market specification, options or accessories).

Ignition switch ________
Starting the engine ____
Important considerations
for driving___________
Refueling ____________
Engine Break-In Period_
Gear changing ________
Cruise control ________
Braking ______________
Electronic Stability
Program (ESP® ) ______
Economical motoring __
Driving in cold weather_
Driving in hot weather _
Towing a trailer 3 _____

140
141
144
146
150
150
159
160
163
170
172
173
174

Driving with a roof rack
load________________
Driving at night _______
Driving with a load ____
Driving with a spare
wheel fitted _________
Driving with the trunk
lid/tailgate open______
Driving in deep water __
Towing the car________
Jump starting ________
Saab Parking
Assistance 3 ________
Parking brake ________
Parking______________

179
181
181
183
183
183
183
186
168
165
165

95_U S_M 07.book Page 140 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

140

Starting and driving
ON position
ST

LOC
K

OFF O
N

IB1120

LOCK position

Ignition switch
The combined ignition switch and
gear-lever lock is located in the center console between the front seats. The ignition
key can only be removed when reverse is
engaged (automatic transmission: selector
in ”P” position).
The key fits all the locks on the car. The key
number is specified on the small plastic
strap that comes with the keys when the car
is delivered. Keep a note of the key number
in a safe place, as you will need to quote it if
ordering a replacement key.
See also page 44.

Engage reverse and turn the key to LOCK.
Automatic transmission: select ”P”.
The gear lever is locked. This is the only
position in which the key can be removed.
The parking lights, hazard warning lights
and interior lighting all work.

OFF position
Gear lever no longer locked.
Certain electrical circuits operational.

All electrical circuits working.
Do not leave the key in the ON position
when the engine is not running.
Turn the key to OFF to switch off the electrical circuits. In the ON position certain warning and indicator lights come on as a check,
and they normally are extinguished after
about 3 seconds.

ST (starter) position
The starter operates when the key is turned
to this position. When released, the key will
spring back to the ON position.
If the engine fails to start, the key must first
be turned back to the position between OFF
and LOCK before the starter can be operated again.
When the starter motor is running, several
electrical circuits are disconnected to facilitate starting.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 141 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Starting and driving
If the car does not start

NOTICE
Take care not to spill drinks or to drop
crumbs over the ignition switch. If dirt or
liquid gets into it, the switch may not
operate properly.

WARNING
• Always remove the key before leaving
the car.
• Always apply the parking brake before
removing the ignition key.

If the text
”Key not accepted.
Contact service.”
is shown on the SID, after a failed start
attempt, the cause could be a fault in the
transmitter in the key, or in the receiver in
the ignition lock. The following should be
done:
• Turn the key back to the LOCK position.
• Turn the key to ON.
• Press one of the buttons on the remote
control (the LED stops blinking).
• Start the engine.
Try another key. If this works, then the fault
is in the first key.
We recommend that you contact an authorized Saab dealer for checking and rectification.
Note:
Certain electronic items, such as cellular
phones, may affect the starting producedure. Be sure that all devices are clear of the
key/ignition switch area.

141

Starting the engine
WARNING
• When starting the engine:
– Sit down in the driver’s seat.
– Depress the clutch pedal fully. If the
gear lever is not in the neutral position,
the clutch pedal must be fully depressed or the car will jump forwards or
backwards, which may cause a crash.
– Never start the car from outside the
vehicle, e.g. through a wound down
window. This could lead to serious
personal injury.
• Engage reverse (R) (position P for
automatic transmission) to remove the
ignition key. The key can only be
removed in this gear position.
• Carbon monoxide (CO) is a colorless,
odorless, poisonous gas. Be alert to
the danger of CO – always open the
garage doors before starting the
engine in the garage.
• There is also a danger of CO poisoning if the exhaust system is leaking.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 142 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

142

Starting and driving

• The tail pipe of the exhaust system
can become very hot during driving.
Bear this in mind when loading and
unloading the car.
• Do not rest or sleep in the car when
parked with the engine running. There
is a risk of depressing the accelerator
which could lead to engine damage.
There is also the risk that exhaust
gases may enter the cabin.
It is possible for air to enter the lubricating
system in conjunction with an oil or oil-filter
change, or if the car has been stored for
some time. This air can cause the hydraulic
cam followers to emit a ticking noise, which
can persist for up to 15 minutes after starting. Although this is quite normal and does
not indicate any malfunction, it is advisable
not to exceed 3,000 rpm before the noise
has disappeared.
The hydraulic cam lifters are completely
service free; the valve clearance is set up at
the factory and will not need any subsequent adjustment.

Starting the engine

Cars with automatic transmission 3

Avoid racing the engine or putting a heavy
load on it before it has warmed up. Drive
away as soon as the oil warning light has
been extinguished to enable the engine to
attain its normal temperature as quickly as
possible.
The engine has an automatic choke and
should be started as follows:

1 The selector lever must be in the P or N
position.
2 Keep your foot on the brake pedal.
3 Start the engine. Let the ignition key
spring back as soon as the engine has
started and is running smoothly – at very
low temperatures, you may need to run
the starter for up to 25 seconds. Wait
20–30 seconds before running the
starter again, to give the battery time to
recover.
Let the engine idle for about 10 seconds. Do
not open the throttle wide for at least
2–3 minutes after starting.

Cars with manual transmission
To start the engine the clutch pedal must
be fully depressed.
1 Depress the clutch pedal fully but do not
touch the accelerator.
2 Start the engine. Let the ignition key
spring back as soon as the engine has
started and is running smoothly – at very
low temperatures, you may need to run
the starter for up to 25 seconds. Wait
20–30 seconds before running the
starter again, to give the battery time to
recover.
Note:
On cars with manual transmission, if the
starter fails to engage when the ignition key
is turned to the start position, make sure the
clutch pedal is full depressed. Mispositioned floor mats or other obstructions
under the clutch pedal may affect starting.
Let the engine idle for about 10 seconds.
Do not open the throttle wide for at least
2–3 minutes after starting.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 143 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Starting and driving
Useful tips on cold climate
starting
If the engine has failed to start after several
attempts in very cold weather, press and
hold the accelerator down to the floor and
run the starter for 5–10 seconds. This will
prevent the engine being flooded (excessively rich fuel-air mixture).
Now start the engine in the normal way – do
not touch the accelerator.
If the engine stalls immediately after starting
(e.g. if the clutch was released too quickly),
do not touch the accelerator when restarting
the engine.

Limp-home mode
The engine management system has a
diagnostic feature that continually checks a
number of internal functions.
If, for example, a fault is detected in the
throttle valve, the engine management
system will go into Limp-home mode.This
limits:
• idling control,
• disables the cruise-control system and
• limits the capacity of the A/C compressor.
If the limp-home mode is in operation
(”Engine malfunction (CHECK ENGINE)”
light on, see below) and the outside temperature is close to or below freezing, you may
need to use some throttle on starting (some
pressure on the accelerator).
If the diagnostic system has detected a fault
in the engine-management system, the
”Engine malfunction (CHECK ENGINE)”
light
on the main instrument panel will
come on (see page 58), indicating that you
should have the car checked as soon as
possible by a workshop. We recommend
that you contact an authorized Saab dealer.

143

NOTICE
If the CHECK ENGINE warning light
starts to flash, ease off the accelerator
slightly. If the light does not cease to flash
within 5 seconds, stop the car in a suitable place as soon as possible and turn
off the engine. The car must be towed to
a workshop. We recommend that you
contact an authorized Saab dealer.
If the CHECK ENGINE warning light
flashes, it indicates that the engine is misfiring which can result in damage to the
catalytic converter.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 144 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

144

Starting and driving

Important
considerations for
driving
The engine-management system in the
Saab 9-5 is called Saab Trionic T7. The
system manages the ignition, fuel injection
and turbo boost pressure.
The Trionic T7 system developed by Saab
is an intelligent engine-management
system designed to achieve optimum drivability under differing driving conditions.
The system makes adjustments automatically, for instance, if the car is being driven
at altitude (oxygen-deficient air), for different grades of fuel (AON 87–93) and for different load conditions.
1 Starting and driving
• Refrain from using full throttle before
the engine has warmed up (before
needle in mid-range on temperature
gauge).
• A safety function prevents the engine
from revving faster than 6,000 rpm by
limiting the induction air.
2 Stopping the engine
• Do not rev the engine immediately
before switching it off – stop the engine
when it is idling.
3 Regulating the boost pressure
• One of the advantages of boost pressure regulation is that the engine can
also be run safely on gasoline with a
lower octane rating, although not lower

than AON 87. However, engine performance will fall slightly and heavy loading and laboring should be avoided. For
optimum performance, use the recommended grade of fuel.
• The maximum boost pressure is
adjusted automatically to the knocking
or pinging tendency of the engine.
Occasional, short-lived knocking when
the engine is under a heavy load is perfectly normal; the extent will depend on
the grade of fuel in the tank.
• Isolated instances of knocking are
more likely to occur with low-octane
fuel. This controlled form of knocking,
followed by a reduction in the boost
pressure, is a sign that the wastegate is
functioning and is perfectly safe for the
engine.

NOTICE
• If the engine sounds strange there is a
fault in the system. Have the car
checked without delay by a workshop.
We recommend that you contact an
authorized Saab dealer.
• The use of fuel with too low an octane
rating can cause serious engine
damage.

WARNING
If the engine is being run with the car on a
rolling road or dynamometer, longer than
for a standard state emission inspection,
to ensure adequate cooling, air must be
blown into the engine compartment and
under the car at a rate equivalent to the
ram-air effect that would be obtained at
the corresponding road speed.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 145 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Starting and driving
Important considerations with
catalytic converters

• Never park the car on dry grass or other
combustible material. The catalytic converter gets very hot and could therefore
start a fire.
• Never drive off if the engine is misfiring.
• If you jump start the car when the engine
is already up to normal temperature, the
engine must start to run on all cylinders.
Stop jump-starting if the engine fails to
start immediately.

NOTICE

The catalytic converter is an emission-control device incorporated in the car’s exhaust
system. It consists of a metal canister with a
honeycomb insert, the cells of which have
walls coated in a catalytic layer (mixture of
precious metals).
To ensure that the catalytic converter continues to function properly, and also to avoid
damage to the converter and its associated
components, the following points must be
observed:
• Have the car serviced regularly in accordance with the service program. The fuel
and ignition systems are particularly
important in this context.
• Always be alert to any misfiring of the
engine (not running on all cylinders) and
any loss of power or performance. At the
first sign of a malfunction, reduce speed
and take the car to a workshop as soon as
possible. We recommend that you contact an authorized Saab dealer.

3
2

IB3879

Use only unleaded gasoline. Leaded gasoline is detrimental to the catalyst and
oxygen sensor and will seriously impair
the function of the catalytic converter.

145

Oxygen-sensor-controlled
injection system
1 Engine control module
2 Oxygen sensor (lambda probe)
3 Catalytic converters

• If the engine fails to start (in very cold
weather or if the battery is flat), the car can
be push started (manual gearbox only) or
started using jumper cables to a donor
battery. However, as soon as you have
started the engine, it is important that it
runs on all cylinders. If it is misfiring, allow
it to idle for up to five minutes to give it time
to settle and run smoothly. If, after this
time, the engine still fails to run properly,
turn off the engine and get in touch with a
workshop for advice. We recommend that
you contact an authorized Saab dealer.

NOTICE
If the car runs out of fuel, it is possible for
air to get into the fuel system. If this
happens, the catalytic converter may
overheat and be damaged.
Failure to follow these directions could
result in the catalytic converter and associated components being damaged, and
could represent a breach of the warranty
conditions.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 146 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

146

Starting and driving

Refueling
WARNING
If you spill fuel and then something ignites
it, you could be badly burned. Fuel can
spray out on you if you open the fuel cap
too quickly. This spray can happen if your
tank is nearly full, and is more likely in hot
weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and
wait for any “hiss” noise to stop. Then
unscrew the cap all the way.
Gasoline fumes are highly explosive.
Therefore:
• never smoke while refueling
• never use gasoline for any purpose
other than as engine fuel
• gasoline is extremely flammable and
can cause severe burns. No open or
exposed flames near gasoline
• do not use a mobile phone at the
same time as refueling.

NOTICE

• Do not overfill. Fuel should not come
right up the filler pipe as room for
expansion is needed for when the
temperature rises.

The engine control module (ECM) monitoring the engine parameters also
stores fault codes.
Under certain circumstances, this may
cause constant illumination of the
”Engine malfunction (CHECK
ENGINE)” lamp
, thus indicating a
fault that must be checked by your Saab
dealer, see page 58.
NOTE: always observe the following two
measures:

• The use of fuel with too low an octane
rating can cause serious engine
damage.
• Clean fuel from painted surfaces as
soon as possible.

• Make sure that the fuel filler cap is
screwed on correctly before the
engine is started. Screw on the fuel
filler cap until you hear 3 distinct
clicks.
• Avoid driving with the fuel low level
indicator illuminated. The symbol
illuminates when less than approximately 2 gallons (8 litres) of fuel
remains in the tank.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 147 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Starting and driving

147

Refueling

NOTICE
WARNING
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do
not remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of
fuel by shutting off the pump or by notifying the station attendant. Leave the area
immediately.
1 Switch off the engine.
2 Open the filler cap, located in the
right-hand rear fender.
3 Insert the fuel pump nozzle beyond the
flange on the filler pipe and let the first
mark (a ring, a pimple or the first
spring-coil) rest on the flange. Do not
withdraw the nozzle while filling is in
progress.
4 Cease refueling the first time the pump
stops, and wait a few seconds after
you´ve finished pumping before you
remove the nozzle.

• Fill to maximum filling capacity.
• Stop filling after the first time that the
nozzle trips to shut off the flow of fuel.
• Filling capacity can differ between
different fuel stations and outside
temperature. Fuel tank volume when
nozzle trips to shut off, may vary by
0.5 gal. (2 liters).
• Do not fill fuel all the way up the filler
pipe. The gasoline must be allowed
room for expansion especially during
hot weather.
Filler cap
When you put the filler cap back on, turn it
to the right (clockwise) until you hear three
clicks. Make sure you fully install the cap.
The most effective way to prevent condensation forming in the tank (and thus avoid
possible running problems) is to keep the
tank well filled.
Before the onset of freezing temperatures in
winter, it may be advisable to add gasoline
anti-freeze to the fuel a few times to dispel
any condensation in the system.

When refueling, hang the filler cap inside
the fuel door

The fuel door has a built in filler cap holder
slot located on the fuel door. Slide the white
ring on the cap into the slot.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure
to get the right type. Your dealer can get one
for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not
fit properly

95_U S_M 07.book Page 148 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

148

Starting and driving

Filling a portable fuel container
WARNING
Never fill a portable fuel container while it
is in your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite the
gasoline vapor. You can be badly burned
and your vehicle damaged if this occurs.
To help avoid injury to you and others:
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside
a vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup
bed or on any surface other than the
ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating the nozzle. Contact should be
maintained until the filling is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.

Fuel (Gasoline Engine)
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the proper maintenance of your
vehicle.
For optimum performance Saab recommends:
• AON 93
Gasoline Octane
Use premium unleaded gasoline with a
posted octane of 93 or higher for best performance. You may also use regular
unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher, but your vehicle's acceleration may
be slightly reduced.
If the octane is less than 87, you may get a
heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher as soon as possible. Otherwise, you
might damage your engine. A little pinging
noise when you accelerate or drive uphill is
considered normal. This does not indicate a
problem exists or that a higher-octane fuel
is necessary. If you are using 87 octane or
higher-octane fuel and hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service.
Gasoline Specifications
It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications which were developed by automobile manufacturers around the world and
contained in the World-Wide Fuel Charter
which is available from the Alliance of Auto-

mobile Manufacturers at www.autoalliance.org/fuel_charter.htm. Gasoline meeting these specifications could provide
improved driveability and emission control
system performance compared to other
gasoline.

NOTICE
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such
as ethers and ethanol, and reformulated
gasolines may be available in your area.
We recommend that you use these gasolines, if they comply with the specifications described earlier. However, E85
(85% ethanol) and other fuels containing
more than 10% ethanol must not be used
in vehicles that were not designed for
those fuels.
California Fuel
If your vehicle is certified to meet California
Emission Standards (see the underhood
emission control label), it is designed to
operate on fuels that meet California specifications. If this fuel is not available in states
adopting California emissions standards,
your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on
fuels meeting federal specifications, but
emission control system performance may
be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp
may turn on and your vehicle may fail a
smog-check test. See Engine malfunction
(CHECK ENGINE) on page 58. If this
occurs, return to your authorized Saab
dealer for diagnosis. If it is determined that

95_U S_M 07.book Page 149 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Starting and driving
the condition is caused by the type of fuel
used, repairs may not be covered by your
warranty.
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the
United States are now required to contain
additives that will help prevent engine and
fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
your emission control system to work properly. You should not have to add anything to
your fuel. However, some gasolines contain
only the minimum amount of additive
required to meet U.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations. Saab recommends that you buy gasolines that are
advertised to help keep fuel injectors and
intake valves clean. If your vehicle experiences problems due to dirty injectors or
valves, try a different brand of gasoline.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as
ethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in your area to contribute to clean air. Saab recommends that
you use these gasolines, particularly if they
comply with the specifications described
earlier.

Notice: Your vehicle was not designed
for fuel that contains methanol. Do not
use fuel containing methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel system and
also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be covered under your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated
for low emissions may contain an
octane-enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy
gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.
Saab does not recommend the use of such
gasolines.
Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of
spark plugs and the performance of the
emission control system may be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on.
If this occurs, return to your authorized Saab
dealer for service.

149

Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the United States or Canada, the
proper fuel may be hard to find. Never use
leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel
would not be covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto
club, or contact a major oil company that
does business in the country where you will
be driving.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 150 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

150

Starting and driving

Engine Break-In Period
Pistons, bores and bearings need time to
obtain uniform, wear-resistant surfaces.
If a new engine is driven too hard, this gradual process of bedding-in will not be possible and the life of the engine will be shortened.
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km), do
not exceed 5,000 rpm.
In addition, refrain from driving the car at full
throttle, other than for brief instances,
during the first 1,800 miles (3,000 km).

Wearing in new brake pads
New brake pads take time to bed in, about
90 miles (150 km) if the car is driven largely
under stop-and-go conditions or about
300 miles (500 km) of highway driving.
To extend the useful life of the pads, avoid
hard braking as much as possible during
this period.

Gear changing
Manual transmission
To start the engine the clutch pedal must
be fully depressed.
The gear positions are marked on the gear
lever. Before reverse (R) can be engaged,
you must lift the ring underneath the
gear-lever knob.
To change gear, fully depress the clutch
pedal and then release it smoothly. It is
inadvisable to drive with your hand resting
on the gear lever, as this can increase the
wear on the transmission.
When changing down from 5th to 4th gear,
ease the gear lever straight back, without
applying any lateral pressure. This will prevent 2nd gear being engaged by mistake,
which can result in overreving and possible
damage to the engine.
Before engaging reverse, wait till the car is
at a standstill, release the accelerator and
fully depress the clutch. From neutral, press
the gear lever firmly to the right before
easing it back into reverse.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 151 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Starting and driving

151

Automatic transmission 3
1 3 5

WARNING

IB471

2 4 R

NOTICE
When the reverse gear is to be engaged
the car must be at a standstill with the
accelerator fully released. Lift the reverse
lock-out collar and push the gear lever
firmly to the right in neutral before easing
it into reverse.

Towing
Towing of cars with manual transmission,
see page 183.

• Make it a habit to keep your foot on the
brake when selecting a drive position,
to prevent the car from creeping forward (or backward if reverse is
selected).
• The car must be at a standstill before
P, R or N is selected. You have to have
your foot on the brake pedal to move
the lever out of P. If the car is still
moving when a drive position is subsequently selected, this could cause a
crash or damage the automatic transmission.
• Never park the car with the selector
lever in a drive position, even if the
parking brake is on.
• If you want to leave the car with the
engine running, move the selector
lever to P or N and apply the parking
brake.

Selector lever
The electronic control module for the automatic transmission receives information on
engine torque and road speed, and also
controls the hydraulic pressure in the transmission to ensure that gear changing is as
smooth as possible.
The position of the selector lever is shown
by the symbols adjacent to the lever and
also by a symbol on the main instrument
panel. If manual mode (M) is selected, the
current gear is also displayed on the main
instrument panel.
The ignition key can only be removed when
the selector lever is in the P position.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 152 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

152

Starting and driving
Three modes for the automatic transmission can be selected: Normal, Manual and
Sport.
Normal mode
The Normal mode, which provides the best
fuel economy, is the default setting when
the engine is started.

IB3853

Manual mode (Sentronic): see page 156.

Selector-lever indicator on main instrument panel
When the car is stationary, the engine must
be at idling speed when the selector lever is
moved.
You must have your foot on the brake
pedal to move the lever out of park.
If the accelerator is depressed while the
lever is moved, this will result in abnormal
wear in the transmission.

NOTICE
After selecting a drive position, pause
briefly to allow the gear to engage (the car
starts to pull a little) before you accelerate.

Detent positions for selector movement
The detent button on the selector lever has
to be pressed before the selector can be
moved between certain positions.

Sport mode
When the Sport mode is selected, the transmission changes up later than in Normal
mode to provide higher performance. In this
mode, the SPORT indicator will appear on
the main instrument panel (see page 158).
Adaptive gear-change pattern
Adaptive gear-change pattern is a transmission function in the Normal and Sport
modes which matches gear changing to
current driving conditions. The transmission
control module senses the load on the
engine and temperature of the transmission. A suitable gear change pattern is then
selected automatically to avoid unnecessary gear changes and undesired temperature increases in the transmission.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 153 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Starting and driving
Lock-up function

Park Brake Shift Lock

The automatic transmission has a lock-up
function, which can render the torque converter inoperative in 3rd, 4th and 5th gears,
thus reducing the engine speed and fuel
consumption.
When the lock-up function comes into operation, it may give the impression of an overdrive being engaged.

The transmission has a security function
known as Park Brake Shift Lock. To move
the gear selector out of the P position, the
brake pedal must be depressed at the same
time as the gear selector catch (detent) is
pressed in.

153

Shift Lock override

Kick-down

NOTICE

When the accelerator is pressed down hard,
a change-down to the next gear will be
effected to provide maximum acceleration,
e.g. for overtaking.
Following this, the next higher gear will be
selected at the optimum engine speed for
acceleration or, if you ease off the accelerator, before reaching this.

Due to electrical problems it may not be
possible to move the selector out of the
park position, even if the ignition is ON. If
for some reason the selector has to be
moved out of the park position (i.e. to tow
the car a short distance) do as described
below.
Check fuse No. 1 (see page 218). If the
problem was cured by changing the fuse or
battery, you do not have to contact a workshop.
If the fuse blows again as soon as the Shift
Lock feature is activated you should contact
a workshop. We recommend that you contact an authorized Saab dealer.

If the fuse is OK, check the battery regarding
the voltage.
1 Apply the parking brake
2 Make sure the key is in position ON
3 Use a small tool such as a screwdriver
and push the lever (see picture) downwards so that the detent button can be
pressed approx. 10 mm
4 Move the selector out of position P to N
5 Remove the tool
6 Release the parking brake if the car is to
be moved immediately; otherwise keep
it applied.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 154 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

154

Starting and driving
Automatic transmission 3,
fault indicator

If ”Automatic transmission 3, fault indicator”
lightappears on the main instrument panel,
the system has detected a fault in the automatic transmission or its control module
(see page 62).
This also means that the Limp-home mode
has been selected, to guard against further
damage being done to the transmission. In
this mode, the automatic transmission
starts in 5th gear, and gear changes (if necessary) will have to be made manually.
Stop the car in a safe place. Switch off then
restart the engine. If the fault is intermittent,
the transmission will operate as normal
despite the fault indicator being on. Have
the car checked at a workshop. We recommend that you contact an authorized Saab
dealer.
It is not possible to select the SPORT or
Sentronic mode when the Limp-home mode
is active.
Gear changes must be made manually.
The following gears will be engaged in the
respective selector positions when the automatic transmission is in Limp-home mode:
Position

Gear

Reverse

5th

2nd

Overheated transmission fluid
NOTICE
If the control module has actuated the
Limp-home function for the automatic
transmission, the car will remain in 5th
gear when D is selected, making it very
sluggish.
Select position L to prevent unnecessary
wear on the transmission. The transmission then starts in 2nd gear. Once the car
is moving you can select position D.
When the indicator light is on, the car
must not be driven with a caravan or
trailer attached.

If the automatic-transmission fluid should
overheat, the following message will appear
on the SID:
”Gearbox too hot.
Make a safe stop.”
In this event, stop the car in a suitable place,
switch off the engine and open the hood.
Wait for several minutes then turn on the
ignition to check that the message has gone
out. When driving subsequent to the transmission fluid overheating, select a gear in
which the engine speed is about 3,000 rpm.
Overheating of the automatic-transmission
fluid can occur when the car is towing a
heavy load, such as a camping trailer in hilly
country. High ambient temperatures can
also increase the temperature of the transmission fluid or the oil cooler may be faulty.
Contact a workshop. We recommend that
you contact an authorized Saab dealer (see
also page 174).

95_U S_M 07.book Page 155 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Starting and driving
Driving on hilly roads with a
heavy load
The transmission fluid can overheat when
the gearbox is strained, for example, when
driving with a trailer on hilly roads. To avoid
the transmission fluid overheating, always
drive in Normal mode. The adaptive gear
change patterns are then active.
High air temperatures or a faulty oil cooler
can also cause the transmission fluid to
overheat. Overheating reduces the service
life of the fluid. Contact an authorized Saab
dealer (see also page 174).

Towing
Towing of cars with automatic transmission,
see page 183.

155

Descending hills
WARNING
Remember to use engine-braking (selector position D or L) to spare the brakes
when you are driving on a long or steep
downhill slope.
Brake failure can result from overheated
brakes!
If the speed of the car increases while
descending a steep hill, despite the accelerator being released, the control module will
change down a gear when you brake. If you
desire more powerful engine braking, manually select a lower gear.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 156 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

156

Starting and driving

Move the selector lever to the M position.
Select a higher gear by pushing the
right-hand paddle
on the steering
wheel. Select a lower gear by pushing the
left-hand paddle
on the steering wheel.
An example of when you may wish to make
manual gear changes is when overtaking, to
enable you to remain in a low gear for an
extended period of time.
Changes from 3rd to 4th and from 4th to 5th
can be made when the engine speed is
above roughly 2,000 rpm.
If you select a gear that is judged too high by
the system, the selected gear position will
be shown briefly on the main instrument
panel and then the gear that is actually
engaged.

IB3880

Sentronic, manual mode 3

Paddles on the steering wheel for
changing gear manually
If the road surface is slippery, you may wish
to pull off in 2nd or 3rd to reduce the risk of
wheel spin.
When descending hills you should select a
low gear to increase the braking effect of the
engine and thus spare the brakes.
Manual gear selections are shown on the
main instrument panel. The selector position and the current gear are displayed.

When the selector lever is in the M position,
as opposed to the D position, engines are
much more responsive to changes in accelerator position. The accelerator has a different feel.
When in manual mode, kick-down operates
for 4th and 5th gears (below 2,000 rpm).
Kick-down cannot be activated in 1st, 2nd or
3rd gears.
For optimum performance, gear changes
should be made before reaching 6,000 rpm.
To avoid damaging the engine and transmission, the transmission will shift up a gear
if the engine is in danger of overrevving. You
may feel a slight jolt before this gear change
is effected.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 157 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Starting and driving
Selector positions
P
To shift out of the P position you must
depress the brake pedal and the ignition
must be ON.
The parking position (P) must only be selected
when the car is at a complete standstill. The
selector lever is locked and the transmission is
mechanically immobilized. Always apply the
parking brake after parking the car.
The engine can be started. The key can be
removed.
R
The reverse (R) position must only be selected
when the car is at a complete standstill. The
detent-release button must be pressed before
the selector lever can be moved to R. Wait until
reverse gear has engaged (car starts to creep)
before touching the accelerator.
N
In the Neutral position (N), the transmission is
disengaged from the engine. The engine can be
started, but first ensure that the parking brake is
on, to prevent the car from moving off unexpectedly.
To prevent the engine and transmission from
becoming hotter than necessary, select N for
stops other than brief ones, e.g. if stuck in a traffic jam.
The normal drive position (D) is recommended
for waiting at traffic lights.

157

D
The Drive position (D) is the position for normal
motoring. Gear changes between 1st and 5th
will take place automatically, the timing of which
is determined by the throttle (accelerator) position and the speed of the car.
After moving the selector lever to D, pause to
give the gear time to engage (car starts to pull).
M
Move the selector lever from position D to M to
allow you to change gear manually. Refer to
page 156.

L
Select position L if you wish to drive in 1st gear.
No upchanges will be made if you pull off in position L. If you move the selector lever from position D or M to L at a high vehicle speed, the
transmission will automatically shift down
through 4th, 3rd and 2nd gears to 1st gear,
depending on the car’s speed. Use this position
for descending steep hills if the car is heavily
loaded to spare the brakes.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 158 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

158

Starting and driving

If you move the selector lever from D to L, down shifts will follow a
set pattern to avoid damaging the engine or transmission.
Manual gear-changing is not recommended on slippery roads.
If one of the drive wheels spins excessively, the engine torque will
be reduced to avoid damaging the transmission.

Adaptive gear-change patterns
Adaptive gear-change patterns are selected automatically depending on the engine load and the present temperature of the transmission. The function is available in Normal and Sport modes.
The changes occur at a higher engine speed and the car remains in
the same gear for longer, if the transmission control module senses
that the load has not decreased. These gear-change patterns prevent unnecessary changing up and down, when for example driving
up or down long slopes with a trailer or caravan, and to prevent overheating the transmission oil. The adaptive gear-change function is
also selected automatically when the transmission oil becomes too
hot, to protect the transmission itself from damage and to lower the
oil temperature.
The adaptive gear-change pattern function is deselected when:
• The engine is switched off.
• The load is reduced so much that the function is no longer
required.
• ”Automatic transmission 3, fault indicator”
instrument panel, see page 154.

appears on main

SPORT modes
To select Sport mode, press the ”S” button on
the selector lever when the selector lever is in
position N or D.
In this mode, gear changes will take place at
higher engine speeds than in Normal mode, in
other words, the transmission will change up
later and change down earlier for the same throttle (accelerator) position.
The Sport mode will be deselected if:
• The SPORT button is pressed.
• The selector lever is moved to position P,R, M
or L.
• The engine is switched off.
• ”Automatic transmission 3, fault indicator”
appears on main instrument panel, see
page 154.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 159 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Starting and driving

Cruise control

When you release the accelerator, the
system will revert to the preset speed.

To cancel temporarily

WARNING

Move the control stalk to CANCEL
(spring-loaded position before OFF position). This will disengage the system but the
preset speed will be retained in the system
memory. (The memory is deleted when the
engine is switched off.)

• Do not use the Cruise control system
on wet or icy roads, in dense traffic or
on winding roads.

•
•
•
•

ON/OFF (switch on/off).
RESUME/– (Resume preset speed).
SET/+ (to set the desired speed).
CANCEL (Cancel operation of system,
e.g. to reduce speed temporarily).
When the system is ON, the CRUISE indicator light will appear on the main instrument panel and will be extinguished when
the system is switched OFF. If CANCEL is
selected, CRUISE will flash once.

IB3881

• Set the control to OFF when you do
not want to use the system, to prevent
the system being activated inadvertently.
For safety reasons (brake system function) the brakes must be applied once,
when the engine has started, before the
cruise control system can be activated.
The system is operated by means of the
controls on the stalk switch:

159

Cruise-control switches

To set the desired speed
Move the switch to ON. Accelerate to the
desired speed (minimum speed: 25 mph
(40 km/h))and press SET/+.

To increase the preset speed
Accelerate to the desired speed and press
SET/+.
You can also increase the speed of the car
using the SET/+ button. Press it once to
increase the speed by 1 mph (1.6 km/h) or
hold it in and release when the desired
speed is reached.

Temporary increase in speed
Press the accelerator to override the preset
speed, e.g. for overtaking.

To re-engage the system
To revert to the preset speed, slide the
switch to RESUME/–. This will only operate
when the car’s speed is above 25 mph
(40 km/h).

95_U S_M 07.book Page 160 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

160

Starting and driving

To reduce the preset speed

Disengaging the system

The cruise control system will always disengage automatically the moment that either
the brake pedal or the clutch pedal is
depressed.
It is also possible to reduce the speed by
means of the RESUME/– button.
Sliding the button to RESUME/– once will
reduce the speed by 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Holding the button in the RESUME/– position will effect a gradual reduction in speed
until the button is released.

The system will be disengaged:
• When the brake or clutch pedal is
depressed.
• When the switch is moved to CANCEL.
• When the switch is moved to OFF.
• When the engine is switched off.
• When the selector lever is moved to position N (cars with automatic transmission).
• When the ESP® system is operative for
more than 1 second.

Braking
To avoid the brakes becoming overheated,
(e.g. when negotiating long descents with a
drop of several hundred feet), select a low
gear to use the braking effect of the engine.
If the car has automatic transmission, move
the selector lever to position D or L.
When driving fast, you can help to prolong
the life of the brakes by thinking ahead and
braking harder for short periods, rather than
braking more moderately over long
stretches.

Brake pad wear indicators
The outboard brake pads on the front
wheels incorporate pad-wear indicators.
When the lining is down to 3 mm, the pad
will produce a screeching, squealing or
scraping noise when the brakes are applied.
New pads should be fitted without delay.
Brake pads should only be replaced by a
workshop. We recommend that you contact an authorized Saab dealer.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 161 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Starting and driving
ABS brakes
WARNING
• It is prudent to try your brakes from
time to time, especially when driving in
heavy rain, through water collected on
the road, in snow, on a wet road surface or in salty slush. In such conditions, the brakes may take longer than
normal to take effect. To rectify this,
touch the brake pedal periodically to
dry the brakes out.
• The same applies after the car has
been washed or when the weather is
very humid.
• Avoid parking the car with wet brakes.
Before parking, and if the traffic conditions allow, brake quite heavily so that
the brake discs and pads warm up and
dry.
• The brakes are power assisted and it
should be kept in mind that the servo
unit only provides the power assistance when the engine is running.
• The brake pressure required when the
engine is off,(e.g. when the car is
being towed) is roughly four times the
normal pedal force required. The
pedal also feels hard and unresponsive.

WARNING
• The additional safety afforded by the
ABS system is not designed to allow
drivers to drive faster but to make
normal driving safer.
• To stop as quickly as possible, without
loss of directional stability, whether
the road surface is dry, wet or slippery,
press the brake pedal down hardwithout letting up (do not pump the
pedal), declutching simultaneously, and steer the car to safety.

161

ABS (antilock braking system) modulates
the brake pressure to the respective
wheels. Wheel sensors detect if a wheel is
about to lock, and the control module
reduces the pressure to that wheel and then
increases it once more until the tendency is
detected again.
The brake system is equipped with an Electronic Brake-force Distribution device
(EBD), which distributes the brake pressure
between the front and rear wheels, in such
a way as to achieve optimum braking performance irrespective of the car’s speed and
load.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 162 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Starting and driving

Braking with ABS brakes.
When the system is operating, the brake
pedal will pulsate gently and the system
will make a ticking noise.

Do not release the brake pedal before the
car has come to a halt or the danger has
passed!
If the road is slippery, the ABS system will
operate even when only light pressure is
applied to the pedal. This means that you
can brake gently to test the condition of the
road and adapt your driving accordingly.
It is well worth practicing the use of ABS
brakes on a skid pad or other suitable
facility.

IB3883

The ABS system has a built-in diagnostic
function which will switch on the Anti-lock
brake warning light if a fault is detected in
the system (see page 60).
The ABS system will not reduce the braking
distance on loose gravel or on snow or ice
but, because the wheels cannot lock up,
some steering control is retained.
When the ABS system is working, i.e. modulation of the brake pressure is in progress,
the brake pedal will pulsate and a ticking
noise will be heard. All this is perfectly normal.
Press the pedal down hard (you cannot
press too hard) and steer the car to safety.

IB3882

162

Braking with ABS – evasive steering

95_U S_M 07.book Page 163 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Starting and driving

WARNING
When driving normally, the ESP® system
will help to improve the stability of the car.
This does not mean that car can be driven
faster. The same care and prudence as
normally applied should be displayed on
cornering and when driving on slippery
roads.
The system employs both the antilock braking system (ABS) and the traction control
system (TCS). It is a system that helps the
driver to stabilize the car in unusual circumstances that would otherwise be more difficult to handle.

How the ESP® system works
The system can help to prevent the car from
skidding by braking one or several wheels
independently of the driver. The engine
output is then also reduced to prevent the
driving wheels from spinning. The car has
sensors that measure wheel speed, yaw
acceleration, lateral acceleration, steering
wheel position and braking pressure. The
values provided by these sensors are used
to calculate the actual direction of the car. If
this direction does not agree with that
intended by the driver, calculated from the
steering wheel position, the ESP® is
engaged.
The ESP® system improves the driver’s
chances of retaining control over the car in
critical situations.
To ensure that the system works as
designed, the dimensions of all four tires
must be the same.

IB1841

Electronic Stability
Program (ESP®)

163

Increased stability with ESP® .
The system applies the brakes to the
wheels as shown in order to reduce the
likelihood of the car skidding

95_U S_M 07.book Page 164 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Starting and driving

The ESP® indicator light

Turning the ESP® system off

The
indicator light on the main instrument comes on for a short period of time
when the ESP® system is operative.

The system can be turned off manually with

Operation of the ESP® system indicates
reduced cohesion between the tires and the
road, and that extra care should be taken by
the driver.

The ESP® OFF-indicator light
The
on if:

the ESP® button, whereupon the
light
on the main instrument panel will come on.
The ESP® system cannot be switched off if
the car is travelling faster than 35 mph
(60 km/h).
The ESP® system is always operative
during braking, even if it has been switched
off manually.

IB4475

164

light on the main instrument comes

• A fault has been detected and the system
has therefore been switched off.
• The system has been switched off manually.
• When the ignition key is turned to the ON
position, the lamp is lit for about four seconds while the system undergoes a
self-test.

NOTICE
Suspension modifications, such as
changing the type of wheels, dampers or
springs, can affect the function of the
ESP® system.
Always consult a workshop before changing any suspension components. We recommend that you contact an authorized
Saab dealer.

ESP® button

95_U S_M 07.book Page 165 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Starting and driving

Parking brake

Parking

WARNING

WARNING
• Do not leave children or pets unattended in the car. In warm, sunny
weather, the temperature inside the
car can reach 160–180°F (70–80°C).
IB360

• Always apply the parking brake when
you park the car.
• Always apply the parking brake
before removing the ignition key.
• Do not use the parking brake while
driving.

165

• Park where the vehicle will not create
an obstruction or a hazard to other
road users.

The parking brake is situated between the
front seats and acts on the rear wheels.
When the parking brake is on, the indicator

• Do not park on dry grass or other combustible material. The catalytic converter gets very hot and could start a
fire.

light
on the main instrument panel will
be on. To release the parking brake, lift the
lever slightly, press the release button and
release the lever by pushing down on it.

• Apply the parking brake.
• Shift to Reverse for manual transmission (automatic transmission: move
selector lever to P (Park)), and remove
the ignition key. Lock the car.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 166 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

166

Starting and driving

NOTICE

• Do not leave small objects such as
CDs, sunglasses and coins visible.
• If possible, park in a well-lit,
conspicuous parking space.
• Thieves strike whenever and wherever they are given the opportunity.

Parking on a hill
When parking on a steep hill, turn the front
wheels so that they will be blocked by the
curb if the car should move.

1
1 Pointing downhill and
against the curb
– Turn the wheels into
the curb and edge the
car forward until the
wheels touch the curb.

2
2 Pointing uphill and
against the curb
– Turn the wheels away
from the curb and edge
the car back until the
wheels touch the curb.

IB485

Empty the car yourself and bear in mind:
• Never leave a mobile phone, camera,
computer or similar object visible in
your car.
• Clothing, packages and bags attract
thieves.

3 Pointing uphill or
downhill – no curb
– Turn the wheels
towards the edge of the
road. If the car should
start rolling, it will not run
into the road.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 167 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Starting and driving
Long-term parking
If the car is not going to be used for some
time, e.g. 3–4 months, the following steps
are recommended:
• Run the engine to normal temperature
before long-term parking.
• Drain the washer-fluid reservoir and
hoses.
• Wash and wax the car. Clean the rubber
seals on the hood, luggage compartment
lid and doors, and lubricate them with
glycerol (glycerin).
• After washing the car, dry the brake discs
by taking the car out on the road and
applying the brakes a few times.

• Fill the fuel tank with fuel to prevent condensation forming in it.
• Top up the coolant and check the antifreeze before the onset of winter.
• Park the car in a dry, covered and
well-ventilated building. Leave the parking brake OFF!
• Disconnect the negative (–) battery lead.
If frost is likely to occur during the
long-term parking, remove the battery
and store it away from the frost.
• Ideally, the car should be put up on
blocks, with the wheels off the ground. If
this is not possible, inflate the tires to
about 43 psi (300 kPa).
• Leave all the windows open a crack and
cover the car with a fabric tarpaulin – not
one made of plastic.

167

95_U S_M 07.book Page 168 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

168

Starting and driving

Saab Parking
Assistance 3
WARNING

• Bear in mind that small and/or narrow
objects cannot always be detected by
the system.
The parking aid system facilitates parking
and reversing. There are four sensors in
the rear bumper that detect objects up to
6 feet (1.8 metres) behind the car.

IB1300

• Saab Parking Assistance can facilitate
reversing at low speeds, such as when
reverse parking.

IB1299

Responsibility always lies with the driver
when reversing.

Area monitored by the sensors seen from
the side

Area monitored by the sensors seen from
above

The system uses four sensors in the rear
bumper. These emit ultrasound signals that
bounce back to the sensors off any objects
behind the car. The system, however,
cannot always detect small or narrow
objects or objects that do not reflect ultrasound back towards the car, such as pipes,
or the corner of a house or rectangular post.

The system is activated automatically when
reverse is engaged or selected. When the
sensors detect an object within the monitored area, the SID will display the text
"PARK ASSIST" and pulses of sound
(- - - - -) will be heard. The frequency of the
pulses increases as the car comes closer to
the object.
When the distance to the object is less
than 12 in. (30 cm), a continuous tone
will be heard.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 169 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Starting and driving
NOTICE
Reverse slowly so that you have time to
stop the car when the continuous tone is
heard at approx. 12 in. (30 cm).
When an object is approximately 3 feet
(90 cm) from the car, the sound pulses
change character markedly. A distance of
about 3 feet (90 cm) is suitable if you wish
to load or unload the luggage compartment.
If the distance between an object and the
corner sensors does not change for three
seconds, e.g. if you are reversing alongside
a wall, the system will switch to monitoring
straight back. The system indicates if the
distance to the wall decreases again.
The system can be disengaged for when
driving with a trailer. Press and hold the CLR
button on the steering wheel when the display shows "PARK ASSIST", until the display shows "PARK ASSIST OFF". The
system is re-engaged in the same way. The
system is also always activated when the
ignition key is turned to ON.

Pressing a steering wheel button briefly will
not disengage the system, the display will
simply show the previously selected function.

NOTICE
To function well, the sensors must be kept
clean. Ice snow and dirt can affect their
sensitivity.
Do not spray the sensors or closer than
8 in. (20 cm) to the sensors with a pressure washer, as this could damage them.
Ice, snow and dirt can affect the sensitivity
of the sensors. In such cases a continuous
tone will sound warning the driver that the
system cannot measure the distance to an
object. You can turn the system off by pressing and holding the CLR button for
1.5 seconds.
If the text "PARK ASSIST FAILURE" is displayed on the SID, have the system
checked by a workshop. We recommend
that you contact an authorized Saab dealer.

169

95_U S_M 07.book Page 170 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Starting and driving

Economical motoring
Factors affecting fuel
consumption
Fuel consumption is greatly affected by the
general driving conditions, the way in which
the car is driven and at what speeds, the
weather, the state of the road, the condition
of the car, etc.

Breaking-in
Fuel consumption may be somewhat higher
during the break-in period (the first 3,000–
4,000 miles (5,000–7,000 km) than stated.

Weather conditions
Fuel consumption can be as much as 10 %
lower in summer than in winter. The higher
consumption in cold weather is explained by
the longer time it takes for the engine to
reach normal operating temperature, and
for the transmission and wheel bearings to
warm up. Fuel economy is also affected by
the distance driven: short journeys of
3–5 miles (5–8 km) do not give the engine
enough time to reach normal temperature.
Strong winds can also affect fuel consumption.

How to read the graph above:
If fuel consumption with the engine at
normal temperature is 28 mpg
(10l/100 km), the actual fuel consumption 3
miles (5 km) after the engine has started
from cold will be:
– 23.5 mpg (12l/100 km) at outside temp.
of 68°F (20°C) (increase of 20 %).
– 17.7 mpg (16l/100 km) at outside temp.
of 32°F (0°C) (increase of 60 %).
– 14 mpg (20l/100 km)) at outside temp. of
–4°F (–20°C) (increase of 100 %).
As can be seen, both the distance travelled
by the car and the outside temperature have
a major impact on fuel consumption after
the engine has started from cold. Thus, if the
car is mainly used for short journeys of
3–5 miles (5–8 km), the fuel consumption
will be 60–80 % higher than normal.

IB311

170

Percentage increase in fuel consumption
of engine starting from cold compared to
engine at normal temperature

95_U S_M 07.book Page 171 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Starting and driving
Driving technique
• To obtain the best running economy, not
only regarding fuel consumption but general wear also, regular service is required.
• High speed, unnecessary acceleration,
heavy braking and much low gear work all
gives rise to higher fuel consumption.
• Frequent gear changing in traffic, starting
in cold weather, the use of studded tires
and roof racks, and towing a trailer all
increase fuel consumption.
• Do not run the engine when the car is stationary.
If idling, it will take much longer before the
engine becomes hot. Engine wear is
greatest during this warming-up phase.
Therefore drive away as soon as possible
after the engine is started and avoid high
revving.

• Driving in a low gear results in higher fuel
consumption than in a high gear because
of the higher engine speed for a given
road speed. Always change up to a higher
gear as soon as traffic conditions allow
and use the highest gear as much as possible.
• Check the air pressure in the tires once a
month. Incorrect pressures increase tire
wear. It is better to have slightly higher
pressure than lower.
• Check fuel consumption regularly.
Increased consumption can indicate that
something is wrong and that the car
needs to be checked by a workshop. We
recommend that you contact an authorized Saab dealer.
Practical trials on the roads have demonstrated that substantial savings in fuel consumption can be made if the above advice
is heeded.

171

Road conditions
Wet roads increase fuel consumption, as do
unpaved roads and driving in hilly country
(the amount of fuel saved driving downhill is
less than the additional amount required to
climb the hill).

WARNING
Never switch the engine off while driving
as the effect of the brakes and power
steering will be greatly reduced.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 172 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

172

Starting and driving

Engine block heater 3
The following are just some of the benefits
to the car and the environment of using an
engine block heater:
• Lower fuel consumption.
• Exhaust emissions substantially reduced
over short runs.
• Reduced wear on the engine.
• Inside of car warms up faster.
The engine heater is effective at outside
temperatures up to 58–68°F (+15–20°C).
The warmer it is outside, the shorter the time
the engine heater needs to be connected.
Longer than 1.5 hours is unnecessary.
If the car is equipped with a removable,
electrical cabin heater that is not in use, this
should be stored in the luggage compartment.

Driving in cold weather
Before starting a journey in cold weather
you should check the following:
• That the wiper blades have not become
frozen to the windshield/glass.
• Brush any snow away from the air intake
for the heater system (opening between
hood and windshield).
• It may be advisable to lubricate the
door-lock cylinder (use molybdenum
disulphide, MoS2) to prevent its freezing.
If the lock has frozen, take care not to
break the key (or use the remote control)
– heat it first or spray it with de-icer.
• Periodically during the winter, add gasoline anti-freeze to the fuel to dispel any
condensation in the fuel tank which could
freeze and cause problems in the system.
Keep the tank well filled to reduce the risk
of condensation forming.
If the car is parked outside in freezing
weather, fuel additives (gasoline
anti-freeze) will not do any good as it
cannot remove water that has already frozen. Park the car in a warm place so that
any ice that may have built up melts, then
add gasoline anti-freeze when filling up
the tank. Condensation is caused by
changes in the outdoor temperature or by
the car being parked alternately in a
garage and outside.
• It is particularly important when the roads
are slippery that the brakes and tires be in
good condition.

• Check the anti-freeze in the engine coolant, see page 195.
The car´s trip computer will warn you when
there is a risk of slippery conditions. For further information on this function, see
page 68.
The car is equipped with tires designed to
provide optimum grip on both wet and dry
roads, although this has been achieved at
the expense of somewhat reduced grip on
snow and ice. For regular driving on snow
and ice, we therefore recommend that
winter (snow) tires be fitted.
Winter (snow) tires, particularly studded
tires (where use is legally permitted), generally make driving safer on snow and ice.
Acquaint yourself with the legal provisions governing the use of different
types of winter tires and snow chains.
Studded tires are not allowed in some
countries.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 173 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Starting and driving
If winter tires are fitted, the same type must
be fitted on all wheels. Your Saab dealer will
be pleased to advise you on the best tires for
your car.
Remember that tires age. It may therefore
be necessary to change them before they
reach the legal wear limit, as they gradually
lose their friction properties.
The best response if the car gets into a
front-wheel skid is to freewheel (manual
gearbox only), i.e. disengage the clutch (so
that the wheels are neither driven or
retarded by the engine.
If the car has automatic transmission, ease
up on the accelerator and steer carefully in
the desired direction.
In a rear-wheel skid, steer in the same direction that the rear of the car is moving.

Tire chains 3
If you want to fit tire chains (where legally
permitted) they should only be fitted to the
tires recommended under ”Specifications”
(see page 266).
Consult your Saab dealer for details of
approved tire chains.

WARNING
• Do not exceed 30 mph (50 km/h)
when tire chains are fitted.
• Tire chains can reduce the directional
stability of the car.
• Tire chains must not be used on the
rear wheels.

NOTICE
• Check the links frequently for wear.
• Check that the chains do not contact
the wheel-arch liner at full lock.
• See section ”Specifications”,
page 266, for information on allowable
wheel dimensions for the fitting of tire
chains.

173

Driving in hot weather
Always check the coolant level before starting a journey. When the engine is cold, the
coolant shall lie on or just above the
KALT/COLD mark on the expansion tank..
At the end of a journey, if the engine has
worked hard, allow it to idle for two or three
minutes before switching it off.
If the needle on the temperature gauge
enters the red zone:
1 Bring the car to a standstill but leave the
engine running. Do not remove the cap
on the expansion tank even if the tank is
empty. If the needle on the temperature
gauge continues to rise while the engine
is idling, switch off the engine.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 174 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

174

Starting and driving

2 Wait until the needle has dropped back
to indicate normal temperature (roughly
midway, in the white zone) before stopping the engine. If the coolant needs topping up, unscrew the cap on expansion
tank carefully.
Top up, as necessary, ideally with a
50/50 mixture of Saab-approved coolant
and water. If only water is available, use
that, but remember to have the coolant
mixture checked as soon as possible.

WARNING
• Exercise care when opening the hood
if the engine is overheated. Never
remove the expansion tank cap completely when the engine is hot.
• The cooling system is pressurized hot coolant and vapor can escape.
These can cause injury to your eyes
and burns. Open the cap slowly to
release the pressure before
removing it.
3 As soon as possible, have the cooling
system checked by a workshop. We recommend that you contact an authorized
Saab dealer.

Towing a trailer 3
WARNING
• When towing a trailer, do not attempt
to negotiate a hill having a gradient in
excess of 15 %. The weight distribution over the front wheels of the car will
be insufficient to prevent wheelspin,
making further progress impossible.
• In addition, the parking brake may not
always be able to hold the car and
trailer securely, with the result that the
wheels can start to slide downhill.
• Always apply the trailer’s parkingbrake when unhitching it. There is otherwise a risk of personal injury or
damage to the bumper should the
trailer start to roll.

Trailer hitch attachment 3
Trailer hitch attachments are available as
accessories. These are designed for a maximum trailer weight of 3500 lbs. (1588 kg),
see also page 259.
Use only the electrical trailer hitch socket
provided in the trailer hitch kit. 3
Saab recommends:
• Use a Saab original hitch kit attachment
which is designed and tested by Saab.
• Consult your Saab dealer regarding the
appropriate hitch kit for your car.

If the car has a 13-pin genuine Saab electrical socket, the trailer/caravan can be equipped with rear fog lamp and reversing lamps.
The caravan can also have interior and
exterior lighting when the car’s ignition is off.
Do not put a load on the battery for so
long that it becomes discharged and the
car cannot be started.
There is also access to power in the caravan
during a journey, the caravan battery can be
charged for example.

NOTICE
Only use a towbar that has been approved for your car. We recommend that you
entrust towbar installation to an authorized Saab workshop, which can also provide important information such as trailer
weight. Your authorized Saab workshop
has information on how the towbar is to be
installed and whether other measures
must be undertaken that could affect the
cooling system or other equipment.
We recommend that you consult an
authorized Saab dealer for guidance on
how to connect the trailer hitch electrical
system.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 175 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Starting and driving
Trailer weight
Maximum recommended trailer weights for
different gradients, with a view to comfort
and drivability for manual and automatic
cars, are shown on the drawing.
Make sure you are familiar with the law
regarding speed limits for towing, maximum trailer weights, trailer-braking
requirements, and also any special
driving-license provisions
(see also page 259).
The specified trailer weights and gradients
assume that the journey starts at the hill and
therefore apply only to short periods.

Maximum recommended trailer weights
for different gradients

175

Recommendations for driving in hilly
terrain
The following time limits are based on the
capacity of the cooling system in warm
weather, i.e. approximately 86°F (30°C).
Gradient Maximum
of hill, % trailer weight,
lbs. (kg)
6–7
3300 (1500)
8–9
3300 (1500)
10–15
1870 (850)

Maximum duration, minutes
unlimited
15 max
15 max

The following time limits are based on the
capacity of the cooling system in hot
weather, i.e. approximately 104°F (40°C).
Gradient Maximum
of hill, % trailer weight,
lbs. (kg)
6–7
2000 (900)
8–9
2000 (900)
10–15
1000 (450)

Maximum duration, minutes
unlimited
15 max
15 max.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 176 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

176

Starting and driving

When negotiating long hills, bear the following important considerations in mind:
• Use Normal mode when driving with a
caravan or trailer on hilly roads. The
adaptive gear change pattern function will
prevent the transmission overheating.
• Rises in coolant temperature are indicated by the temperature gauge in the
main instrument panel.

Recommendations for cars with
automatic transmission
Rises in coolant temperature are indicated
by the temperature gauge in the main instrument panel.
The following steps are taken in order as the
temperature of the engine increases:

When continuing your journey, select
manual mode and a gear in which the
engine speed is about 3,000 rpm until the
incline eases (see page 157).

• Gear change pattern is altered.
• A/C compressor is switched off.
• Engine torque is reduced.
The following message will be displayed on
the SID if the transmission fluid becomes
too hot:
“Gearbox too hot.
Make a safe stop.
If this message appears, stop the car as
soon as it is safe to do so and allow the
engine to idle until the message has gone
out. The selector lever should be in
position P.

Remember to use the braking effect of the
engine (position D or L) when you are
descending long or steep hills to spare
the brakes.
Brake failure can result from overheated
brakes!

WARNING

95_U S_M 07.book Page 177 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Starting and driving
Recommendations for cars with manual
gearbox
Rises in coolant temperature are indicated
by the temperature gauge in the main instrument panel.
The following steps are taken in order as the
temperature of the engine increases:
• A/C compressor is switched off.
• engine torque is reduced.
When continuing your journey, select a gear
in which the engine speed is about
3,000 rpm until the incline eases.

WARNING
Utilize the braking effect of the engine
(1st, 2nd or 3rd gear) when you are
descending long or steep hills to spare
the brakes.
Brake failure can result from overheated
brakes!

177

Driving considerations

Checks before driving

Always take extra care when towing a
trailer, as the car’s handling will be different
and its braking effect reduced. The trailer’s
braking system and suspension also have a
considerable effect on these characteristics, see also ”Driving with a load” page 181.
If the car has automatic transmission, select
position D when ascending steep hills. This
ensures that the adaptive gear change patterns are operational, see page 158. Use
position D or L for steep descents.

Make sure that the car and camper or trailer
are in good working order. This is essential
since towing a camper or trailer increases
the strain on the car.

NOTICE
If the ”Automatic transmission 3, fault
indicator” indicator
comes on, cease
towing until the problem has been rectified.

• Check and if necessary adjust the tire
pressure of the car and camper or trailer.
• Make sure all wheel bolts are properly
tightened.
• Make sure that the equipment joining the
car and camper or trailer is properly
secured and adjusted.
• Make sure the camper or trailer’s electrical cable is properly connected and is not
so long that it drags along the ground.
Also, make sure the cable is not too short
and risks breaking when turning a corner.
• Check all bulbs.
• Check the car and camper or trailer
brakes.
• Make sure that all items on or in the caravan or trailer are properly secured.
• Make sure that the camper or trailer’s
jockey wheel is raised and locked.
• Check the distribution of the load so that
the car and camper or trailer are well balanced.
• Check that the rearview mirrors provide
the best possible rearward vision.
• Make sure the camper or trailer’s safety
cable is correctly attached.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 178 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

178

Starting and driving

The weight distribution on the trailer makes
a lot of difference to the handling properties
of the car and trailer combination. As
regards single-axle trailers, whenever possible, concentrate the load over the wheels
and keep it as low as possible.
The trailer should be loaded so that the
maximum load on the towbar ball is 5 % to
7 % of the trailer weight with a maximum
permissible tongue weight of 110–165 lbs.
(50–75 kg).
Note that this load must be added to the total
load for the car. If this now exceeds the
specified load capacity, the load in the luggage compartment will have to be reduced
by a corresponding amount.

WARNING
When you connect the trailer be sure to
attach its safety chains to the holes as
illustrated.

IB106

Trailer hitch load

Distribution of load in trailer
a Light
b Moderate
c Heavy

Attach the safety chains to the holes as
illustrated

95_U S_M 07.book Page 179 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Starting and driving

179

Driving with a roof rack
load

• Due to higher aerodynamic drag, fuel
economy may suffer when driving with
a roof rack.
The maximum permissible roof load is
220 lbs. (100 kg).
Note that the roof load is included in the
car’s maximum permissible load (see
page 258).
Strong, sturdy roof carriers 3 designed specially for the car are available from your
Saab dealer. Always secure the roof load
safely.

Fitting the roof carriers 3,
9-5 Sedan and 9-5 SportCombi
without roof rails
The carrier feet are marked with a top view
of the car and arrow indicating their positions.
1 Slip the plastic cover onto the adjustable
foot of the carrier (foot with knob for
tightening) to protect the paintwork
during assembly.
2 Open all the doors.
Fold back the rubber strip and find the
fixing holes.

IB481

• A roof load will affect the car’s center
of gravity and aerodynamics. Be
aware of this when cornering and driving in crosswinds.
• Suit your speed to the prevailing conditions.

IB480

WARNING

3 Start on the left-hand side of the car.
Rest the carrier carefully across the roof,
with the rigid foot towards you. Hold the
foot clear of the roof to avoid damaging
the paintwork.
Fold back the rubber strip and insert the
pins on the foot into the fixing holes.
Make sure that the rubber strip comes
inside the plastic cover on the carrier.
Repeat the procedure with the other
carrier.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 180 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Starting and driving
Fitting the roof carriers 3,
9-5 SportCombi with roof rails
1 Clean the car’s roof rails.
2 Check the markings on the cross members to see which is the front and which
is the rear roof carrier.
3 Place the cross members on the roof
rails, on their respective sides of the
center supports. The cross members
must not be placed beyond the front or
rear joint on the rail. Ensure that the distance between the cross members is at
least 28 inches (700 mm).
If a roof box is to be fitted, the cross
members must be positioned so that the
tailgate can be opened fully without hitting the roof box.
4 Using your thumb, press the bracket so
that it lies snugly against the outside of
the roof rail. Make sure that the roof carriers are seated centrally on the rubber
spacers and that these sit correctly on
the roof rail. Pull the spacers down
slightly on the inside of the roof rail.
5 Center the roof carriers so that they protrude equally on both sides.
6 Tighten the roof carriers by hand.
Ensure that the tightening knobs are
upright once the roof carriers have been
tightened.
7 Make sure the roof carriers are securely
in place.

IB1294

4 Close the doors on the left-hand side of
the car gently, to hold the carrier feet in
place.
5 Now go around to the other side of the
car and remove the plastic cover from
the carrier’s adjustable foot. Fold back
the rubber strip and insert the pins on the
foot into the fixing holes. Do the same
with the other carrier and close the doors
gently.
6 Tighten each carrier by turning the knob
clockwise (by hand). Tighten just
enough to bring the foot up against the
edges of the fixing holes.
Remove the carriers when not in use, as
they increase fuel consumption.
The instructions that accompany the carriers also include advice on driving with a roof
load – we strongly recommend that you
read them carefully.

IB1295

180

95_U S_M 07.book Page 181 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Starting and driving

Driving at night

Driving with a load

Bear in mind the following points when
driving at night:

The driving characteristics of the car are
affected by the way it is loaded.

• Nighttime driving requires your full concentration.
• Do not rush. Count on your journey taking
slightly longer.
• The number of drivers under the influence
of drugs is likely to be greater at night than
during the day.
• Do not stare at the headlights of oncoming vehicles.
• Avoid driving at night if you have poor
eyesight. Night vision deteriorates with
age.
• Keep your car's headlights, windows and
mirrors clean. Also, if you wear glasses,
make sure they are clean.
• Make sure you are well rested before
starting a long journey. Take a break
every other hour.
• Only eat light meals. Heavy meals have a
tendency to induce tiredness.

• Place heavy loads as far forward and as
low as possible in the trunk.
• Secure the load to the tie downs, see
page 131.
• The load should be such that the car´s
total weight or axle weight are not
exceeded, see page 258.
• Heavy loads mean that the car’s center of
gravity is further back. As a result, the car
will sway more during evasive steering.
• Never exceed the permissible load in the
roof box 3, even if there is room for more.
• Ensure that the tire pressure is correct –
slight overinflation is preferable to underinflation.
• The braking distance of a loaded car is
always greater. Keep your distance from
the vehicle in front.
• Roof loads can negatively affect telecommunication.
Tire pressure, see page 268 and back
cover.

181

95_U S_M 07.book Page 182 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

182

Starting and driving

Tires
WARNING
Check the tire pressure at least once a
month and before long journeys. Underinflation can result in:
• Punctures
• Separation of the tire and tread
• Damage to the sidewalls
• Damage to the rims on poor roads
• Poor handling characteristics
• Premature tire wear
• Increased fuel consumption.

The tire pressure should match the current
load and speed of the car; for cars sold in
U.S. see page 231; for cars sold in Canada
see page 267.
The tire pressures given apply to cold tires,
that is tires that are the same temperature
as the outside air temperature.
The tire pressure increases as the tires
become warm (e.g. during highway driving)
with approximately 0.3 bar (4 psi). When
the temperature of the tires changes by 50°
(10°C), the tire pressure will change 0.1 bar
(2 psi).

Never reduce the pressure of a hot tire. If the
tires are hot when you check them, only
increase the pressure, if necessary.
Underinflated tires wear more quickly than
slightly overinflated tires.
If a valve is leaking, simply unscrew it and fit
a new one.
Important! Remember to adjust the tire
pressures if you change the load in the car
or intend to drive at substantially lower or
higher speeds than normal.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 183 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Starting and driving

Driving with a spare
wheel fitted

Driving in deep water

See page 235.

NOTICE

Driving with the trunk
lid/tailgate open

Do not drive in water deeper than
12 inches (30 cm) and do not drive faster
than 3–4 mph. Water can otherwise be
sucked into the engine. The engine will be
seriously damaged if water enters the
intake system.

Avoid driving with the trunk lid/tailgate partly
or fully open, since exhaust fumes can be
drawn into the cabin.
If you must drive with the trunk lid/tailgate
open, all windows and the moonroof 3 must
be closed and the cabin fan on at its highest
speed setting.

183

Towing the car
WARNING
• Remember that the brake servo does
not operate when the engine is off.
Much greater pressure than normal
will therefore be required to operate
the brake pedal.
• Nor does the steering servo operate
when the engine is off. The steering
will therefore be much heavier than
usual.
• The towing vehicle should always be
heavier than the vehicle on tow.
• Never allow passengers to ride in the
car being towed.
• Always seek professional help if the
car needs to be towed.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 184 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

184

Starting and driving

Front towing eye
WARNING
• Make sure that the towing eye at the
front is screwed in tightly.

NOTICE
• Do not drive the car with the front
towing eye in position. If it catches the
curb, for example, the engine subframe could be damaged.
• Refit the plastic plug in the hole when
the towing eye has been removed, to
keep dirt and moisture out of the
threads.

Front towing eye
The front towing eye is stored with the spare
wheel.
The attachment point (tapped hole) for the
towing eye is midway along the engine subframe at the front of the car.
Remove the plastic plug and screw in the
towing eye securely.
To ensure that the towing eye is in far
enough, insert the handle of the wheel
wrench through the eye for additional
leverage.

IB3886

• Make sure that all bystanders keep a
suitable distance, in case the towing
eye or tow rope should break. The
towing eye or tow rope could catapult
off and cause serious injury.

IB3885

• The towing eye is only designed for
use when the car is being towed on the
road. It must not be used to pull the
car out of a ditch, for example.

Rear towing eye

Rear towing eye
The car has a permanently mounted towing
eye at the back. If the car is equipped with a
trailer hitch, this can be used instead of the
towing eye.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 185 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Starting and driving
Towing the car

185

Transporting the car

NOTICE

• Never use the towing eyes to pull the
car unstuck.

If a car with a sport (lowered) chassis is
transported, for example on a flat bed
truck, take extra care not to damage the
spoiler and/or underbody.

Gear lever in neutral (in cars with automatic
transmission: selector lever at N (neutral))
Turn on the parking lights.
Drive carefully and do not exceed the
speed limit for vehicles being towed.
Always try to keep the towrope taut by
gently applying the brake, as necessary.
This will avoid the towrope being jerked
violently.
The local regulations on towing speeds
must be followed.
The highest permissible towing speed is
30 mph (50 km/h), unless the legal limit is
lower. The longest permissible towing distance is 30 miles (50 km). If the car has to
be transported farther than that, summon a
tow truck. A flat bed tow truck is the preferred method to tow.
Failure to follow these guidelines can result
in damage.

Never use the towing eyes to pull the car
unstuck
Cars with automatic transmission

NOTICE
• The car must be towed front first.
• If the car is to be towed with the front
wheels off the ground, make sure the
parking brake is off, as this acts on the
rear wheels.
The car cannot be push started. In an emergency, it is possible to start the engine using
jump leads (see the section, ”Jump starting”
on page 186).

95_U S_M 07.book Page 186 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

186

Starting and driving

Jump starting

To jump start your vehicle:
1 Check the other vehicle. It must have a
12-volt battery with a negative ground
system.

WARNING

If your battery has run down, you may want
to use another vehicle and some jumper
cables to start your Saab. Follow the steps
below to do it safely.

NOTICE
If the other system is not a 12-volt system
with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged.
IB3931

• When working on the battery, highly
explosive gas can build up. A spark
could ignite this gas that collects
around the battery.
Therefore, always avoid sparks and
open flames in the vicinity of the battery.
• The battery contains corrosive sulfuric
acid. Always wear a face mask or goggles when working on the battery.
• If battery acid gets into the eyes or
splashes onto skin or clothing, wash
the affected area liberally with water.
If acid gets into the eyes or a large
quantity makes contact with the skin,
seek medical help.
• Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash your hands after
handling.

NOTICE
Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be
covered by your warranty.
Trying to start your car by pushing or pulling it could damage your vehicle, even if
you have a manual transmission. If you
have an automatic transmission, your
vehicle cannot be started by pushing or
pulling it.

2 Get the vehicles close enough so the
jumper cables can reach, but be sure the
vehicles are not touching each other. If a
poor connection on the negative jumper
cable should exist, it is possible for
damage to be caused to electrical systems/components of either vehicle
should inadvertent contact be made.
You would not be able to start your car
and bad grounding could damage electrical systems.

WARNING
You could be injured if the vehicles roll.
Set the parking brake firmly on each vehicle. Put an automatic transmission in P
(Park) or a manual transmission in
Neutral.
3 Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.
Turn off all lights that are not needed,
and radios. This will avoid sparks and
help save both batteries and it could
save your radio.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 187 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Starting and driving
NOTICE

WARNING

If you leave your radio on, it could be
badly damaged. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
4 Open the hood and locate the battery.
Find the positive (+) and negative (–) terminals on the battery.

WARNING
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from
any underhood electric fan.

Using a match or flame of any kind near a
battery can cause battery gas to explode.
You can suffer burns or be blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water.
The battery installed in your new Saab
has filler caps. Be sure the right amount
of water is there. Add distilled or boiled
water if the level is too low. If you don’t,
explosive gas could be present.
Be sure the electrolyte in the battery is not
frozen. Discharged batteries will freeze.
When connecting jumper cables to a
frozen battery, gas from the chemical
reaction inside the battery can build up
under the ice and cause an explosion.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn
you. Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin,
flush the area with water and get medical
help immediately.

187

5 Check that the jumper cables do not
have loose or missing insulation. If they
do, you could get a shock and also the
vehicles could be damaged.
Before you connect the cables, here are
some basic things you should know.
Positive (+) will go to positive (+) and
negative (–) will go to a major metal
engine part with a good ground. Do not
connect (+) to (–) or you will get a short
that could injure you or would damage
the battery and maybe other parts as
well.
6 Connect the red positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
7 Do not let the other end touch metal.
Connect it to the positive (+) terminal of
the good battery. Use a remote positive
(+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
8 Now connect the black negative (–)
cable to the good battery’s negative
terminal.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 188 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

188

Starting and driving
WARNING

Do not let the other end touch anything
until the next step. The other end of the
negative cable does not go to the dead
battery. It goes to a major metal part with
a good ground on the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
9 Attach the cable at least 18 inches
(45 cm) away from the discharged battery, but not near engine parts that
move. To avoid an arc which could detonate the hydrogen gas around the battery, the final connection must be at least
18” from the battery.
10 Start the vehicle with the good battery
and run the engine for a while.
11 Try to start the vehicle with the discharged battery. If it does not start after
a few tries, it probably needs service.
12 Remove the cables in reverse order to
prevent electrical shorting. Take care
that they do not touch each other or any
other metal.

Charging the battery/Jump
starting
To avoid damaging the car’s electrical
system and electronics, the following rules
must be followed when charging the battery
or jump starting the car.
• If the charger 3 or starter unit 3 can be
set to different voltages
(6V/12V/18V/24V), 12V must be
selected.
• Follow the manufacturer’s instructions
supplied with the charger or starter unit.
• Nothing that is plugged into an electrical
outlet should be connected to the car
during charging or jump starting.
• The charger or starter unit must under no
conditions produce a voltage greater
than:
• 16V continuous
• 18V for 60 min.
• If you are unsure about the charge rating
of the unit, disconnect the battery clamp
from the positive terminal before connecting the unit to the battery.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 189 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Car care and technical information

189

IB3888

Car care and technical information

3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars
(can depend on model variant, engine variant,
market specification, options or accessories).

Hood ________________
Engine compartment __
Emission control
systems ____________
Engine ______________
Engine oil ____________
Transmission fluid ____
Coolant ______________
Brake and clutch fluid__
Power steering fluid ___
Air filter _____________
Battery ______________
Drive belts ___________
Wipers and washers ___
Changing bulbs _______
Fuses _______________

190
191
192
194
194
195
195
196
198
198
199
201
202
204
216

Tires ________________
Compact spare tire ____
Safety belts __________
Upholstery and trim ___
Textile carpeting ______
Washing the car ______
Waxing and polishing__
Engine compartment __
Touching up the paint _
Air conditioning (ACC) _
Anti-corrosion treatment
For long trips_________
Recovery and/or
recycling of automotive
materials ___________
Headlight aiming ______

222
234
239
240
240
241
242
242
242
243
245
246

247
247

95_U S_M 07.book Page 190 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

190

Car care and technical information

WARNING
Never hold your fingers between the hood
and safety catch if lowering but not closing the hood.
Check that the hood is now closed securely.

Hood release handle

IB3890

The hood release handle is located underneath the instrument panel. To open the
hood:
1 Pull the release handle.
2 The front of the hood will now spring up,
providing access to the secondary
safety catch.
3 Push the catch upwards, pushing the
hood downward a little bit at the same
time. The hood can now be lifted right
up.
To close the hood, release it from a height
of about 8 - 16 in (20-40 cm). Do not press
down on it.

IB3889

Hood

Hood secondary safety catch

95_U S_M 07.book Page 191 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Car care and technical information

Engine compartment
Engine compartment

5
IB3637

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Engine-oil dipstick/filler cap
Reservoir, brake/clutch fluid
Fuse box
Expansion tank, coolant
Washer-fluid filler cap
Battery
Turbo unit
Ignition discharge module
Reservoir, power-steering fluid

191

95_U S_M 07.book Page 192 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

192

Car care and technical information

Engine families
Saab cars imported into the United States
and Canada meet all applicable emission
control standards. The engine family and
appropriate tune-up specifications are identified on a label affixed to the left front inner
fender.
These engine families meet applicable EPA
Federal Standards, California State Standards and Canadian Federal Standards and
are equipped with the following systems:
•
•
•
•
•

Sequential multiport fuel injection system
Three way catalytic converter
Crankcase emissions control system
Evaporative emission control system
On-Board diagnostic (OBD II) system.

Emission control
systems
The systems for controlling emissions to the
atmosphere require regular checking and
adjustment at the intervals specified in the
service program.
In addition to meeting the exhaust emission
regulations and thereby helping to keep the
environment clean, a correctly tuned engine
will also give maximum fuel economy.

WARNING
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,
and certain vehicle components contain
or emit chemicals known to the State of
CA to cause cancer and birth defects and
reproductive harm. In addition, certain
fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 193 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Car care and technical information
Saab Trionic engine
management system
The Saab Trionic engine management
system is a unique Saab development that
combines sequential multiport fuel injection,
electronic distributorless ignition and turbocharger boost pressure control into one system.
The Trionic engine control module (ECM)
monitors many different engine parameters
such as:
• Intake manifold pressure
• Intake air temperature
• Crankshaft position
• Engine coolant temperature
• Throttle position and
• The oxygen content of the exhaust gases.
The ECM receives information regarding
engine knocking from a sophisticated feedback function in the ignition discharge unit.
By processing all of this information, the Trionic system can control fuel injector opening duration, ignition timing and turbocharger boost pressure to provide excellent
engine performance while maintaining low
emissions and fuel consumption.

NOTICE
The Trionic engine management system
continuously monitors the operation of
these systems and has on-board diagnostic capabilities (OBD II).
If the ”Engine malfunction (CHECK
ENGINE)” lamp
in the main instrument illuminates, this indicates that the
Trionic ECM has detected a problem. The
car will continue to operate, but performance may be diminished. You should
have your car checked by a Saab dealer
as soon as possible.

193

ORVR (Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery)
Hydrocarbon vapors formed when refueling
will be recovered by the car and not
released into the atmosphere. The hydrocarbons are absorbed in a evaporative
emission canister. When the engine is subsequently started, the evaporative emission
canister is gradually purged as air is sucked
into it through a shut-off valve. The hydrocarbon/air mixture passes through the evap
canister purge valve and into the engine
where it is burned.
When refueling, make sure you screw the
filler cap on and keep turning until it has
clicked at least 3 times. Otherwise, it is possible for the CHECK ENGINE light to illuminate.
Refueling, see page 146.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 194 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

194

Car care and technical information

Engine

NOTICE
• Do not operate the engine with a low
oil level.

IB601

The 2.3-liter model is a transverse, 4-cylinder in-line engine with twin overhead camshafts and 4 valves per cylinder.
This engine is equipped with balance shafts
that reduce engine vibration to a minimum.
The balance shafts are chain driven and
rotate at twice the speed of the crankshaft.
They produce forces and torques that are
opposed to those generated by the pistons
and connecting rods, an effect that occurs
twice for each revolution of the engine.
Engine noise is also reduced as the
counter-rotating shafts counteract the vibration from the moving parts of the engine.
The transmission, located on the right
(viewed from the front), is integrated with
the engine. All models have front-wheel
drive.

When necessary, add oil of the recommended grade via the dipstick tube.
Recommended oil grade, see page 261.

Balance shafts

Engine oil
Checking the oil level
Check the engine-oil level regularly. This
should be done after the engine has been
run to normal temperature and then allowed
to cool for 2–5 minutes, with the car standing on level ground. Remove the dipstick
and wipe it clean before checking the level.
The oil level must not be allowed to drop
below the MIN mark on the dipstick, nor
should oil be filled beyond the MAX mark, as
this can lead to excessive oil consumption.
The distance between the MIN and MAX
marks on the dipstick corresponds to a
volume of approximately 1.05 qts (1 liter).

• Change engine oil and oil filter as prescribed in the service programme.
• Only use the recommended oil type.
Follow the three points listed above to
avoid severe engine damage.
More frequent oil changes are recommended if your vehicle is operated under
certain conditions, see page 252.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 195 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Car care and technical information

Manual transmission
Check and top up the fluid in accordance
with the service program.

Automatic transmission
Check and top up the fluid in accordance
with the service program.

Coolant
WARNING
• Proceed with caution if the radiator is
boiling when you open the hood.
Never remove the expansion-tank
filler cap when the radiator is boiling.
• The cooling system is pressurized –
hot coolant and vapor can escape
when the filler cap is released. These
can cause injury to your eyes and
burns. Loosen the cap carefully, and
let the engine cool before removing
the cap.
• Exercise care when adding coolant.
C oolanton hot surfaces constitutes a
fire risk.
There is an overpressure in the cooling system. Coolant temperatures can sometimes
exceed 212°F (100 °C).
The expansion tank is transparent to facilitate checking of the coolant level.
When the engine is cold, the coolant shall lie
on or just above the KALT/COLD mark on
the expansion tank.

IB1338

Transmission fluid

195

Coolant expansion tank
If the message
”Coolant level low.
Refill.”
is displayed on the SID, check the level of
fluid in the expansion tank.
Top up, as necessary, with equal parts of
clean water and Saab-approved coolant.
Coolants of a different brand could damage
the engine or cooling system. We therefore
recommend strict use of coolants that have
been approved by Saab.
If the expansion tank is empty when coolant
is added, run the engine to normal temperature and top up again, as necessary.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 196 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

196

Car care and technical information

The cooling system is charged at the factory
with coolant containing a 45 % concentration of a combined antifreeze and corrosion
inhibitor. A weaker mixture will result in
reduced anticorrosion protection. For protection against freezing in very cold
weather, a stronger concentration will be
needed.
A 60 % concentration of antifreeze will provide protection at temperatures down to
–58°F (–50°C).
The coolant does not normally have to be
changed during the service life of the car.
The type of coolant used has a reddish color
and should not be mixed with other types of
coolant. Saab Original coolant should be
used all year round. Only use coolant
approved by Saab.
Note:
If incorrect coolant is used or added, the
life-time properties will be affected. Even if
the coolant is flushed from the system and
replaced with life-time coolant, life-time
properties are no longer retained and the
coolant must then be drained and replaced
at regular intervals.

Brake and clutch fluid
NOTICE
Always mix the antifreeze with the
appropriate volume of water before
adding it to the cooling system.
If pure antifreeze is added, the engine
could still freeze and be damaged. This is
because the antifreeze will not mix
properly with the coolant before the
thermostat has opened to allow full
circulation.

WARNING
Brake fluid deteriorates as it becomes
old. Because it is hygroscopic, it absorbs
water from the air and, in time, could allow
vapor to form in the brake system, thus
reducing its performance. It is therefore
important that brake fluid be changed regularly, as specified in the service program.

Checking the fluid level
The combined brake and clutch-fluid reservoir is transparent to facilitate checking of
the fluid level.
The level should be between the MAX and
MIN marks. Top up, as necessary, with
DOT 4 fluid. Do not use DOT 5 brake fluid.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 197 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Car care and technical information
Brake pad wear indicators

IB1188

Use only new brake fluid from a sealed container.
Check that there are no leaks in the brake
system.
The brake fluid level will fall somewhat as
the brake pads wear. The MAX level in the
reservoir corresponds to the amount of
brake fluid required with new brake pads. If
the fall in fluid level is moderate, due to
normal brake pad wear, topping up is not
necessary.
Changing of the brake fluid should be
carried out by a workshop. We recommend that you contact an authorized
Saab dealer.
The vehicle´s regular braking system is
adjusted automatically, but the parking
brake has to be adjusted manually. This
work, involving adjustment of the parking
brake cables and brake pads, must only be
carried out by a workshop. We recommend
that you contact an authorized Saab dealer.

197

Brake and clutch-fluid reservoir
It is not possible to detect, through abnormal
pedal or parking brake-lever travel, whether
brake pads are worn and need replacing. It
is therefore essential that brake pads be
checked regularly, as specified in the service program.

NOTICE
Avoid spilling brake fluid onto paintwork,
since it can cause the paint to bubble and
lift. If any brake fluid is spilled, the area
should be flushed with large quantities of
water as quickly as possible.

The outboard brake pads on the front
wheels incorporate pad-wear indicators.
When the lining is down to 0.11 in (3 mm),
the pad will produce a screeching, squealing or scraping noise when the brakes are
applied. New pads should be fitted without
delay.
Brake pads should only be changed by a
workshop. We recommend that you contact an authorized Saab dealer.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 198 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

198

Car care and technical information

Power steering fluid

Air filter

WARNING

WARNING
• For Service and Repair, parts equivalent to those used by Saab should be
used.

• Power steering fluid on hot engine
components constitutes a fire risk.

• Be aware that some non standard
replacement parts may put you in an
unsafe condition, even if they might fit.

Check the level of the power steering fluid in
the reservoir regularly, in accordance with
the service program.
The wheels should point forward during the
check.
Clean around the cap before it is
unscrewed. Clean the dipstick. Screw in the
cap completely again before checking the
level.
The oil should lie between the MAX and MIN
marks when the oil temperature is about
70°F (+20°C). If the oil is colder the level can
be lower, and in higher temperatures the
level can be higher, both of which are
acceptable.
Top up with ”Power Steering Fluid CHF 11S
or CHF 202”.

IB501

• Do not fill the power steering fluid to
above the MAX mark. Too much fluid
can result in leakage.

Power steering fluid reservoir

95_U S_M 07.book Page 199 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Car care and technical information

199

Battery
NOTICE
WARNING

• Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash your hands after
handling.

IB3129

• Work on the battery may entail an
explosion hazard, since the battery
gives off hydrogen which forms an
explosive mixture with the oxygen in
the air.
For this reason, always avoid sparks
or open flames when working near the
battery.
• The battery contains corrosive sulfuric
acid. Always wear a face mask or
goggles when working on the battery.
• If battery acid gets into the eyes or
splashes the skin or clothing, wash the
affected area liberally with water.
If acid gets into the eyes or a large
quantity makes contact with the skin,
seek medical help.

A discharged battery can freeze and fracture. Batteries should therefore always be
stored away from frost.

Electrolyte level indicator.
Level correct if level indicator dark.
Battery should be changed if indicator is
light

The battery is provided with a cover to protect it from radiated heat. If the battery is
exposed to high temperatures, its life will be
shortened. To remove the cover, release
the two clips along its long sides.
The cover fits the standard battery installed
in the car. If a new battery is to be fitted,
make sure that its dimensions are the same
as the standard one.
The battery is maintenance free and should
be changed if the electrolyte level is too low.
The indicator on the top side of the battery
will be white if the battery needs replacing.
The fluid level and the charge level should
be checked regularly.

If frequent short journeys are made, the battery may need to be given a booster charge.
This can be done either using a battery
charger or by taking the car for a long run.
A car with a standard equipment specification and a fully charged battery can be left
for up to 40 days and still have a sufficient
charge for starting. If extra equipment is fitted, such as a car phone, the charge may
only be sufficient for about 15 days.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 200 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

200

Car care and technical information

Charging/replacing the battery
NOTICE

Connect the positive lead to the positive (+)
battery terminal (red), and the negative lead
to a good ground point, e.g. the lifting lug at
the front of the engine.
To remove the battery, always disconnect
the negative (black) lead first and reconnect
it last when fitting the new battery.
The battery size must comply with DIN
53735 MFI 230/2.16.

• If boost charging never use anything
but a 12-volt charger, see page 188.
• Never reverse the polarity of the battery by connecting the leads to the
wrong terminals. The red, positive
lead connects to the positive (+) terminal, and the black, negative lead to the
negative (–) terminal.
• Serious damage can occur to the car´s
electrical system if a battery or alternator lead is disconnected while the
engine is running.

IB3130

To avert the danger of short-circuiting
between the positive (+) terminal on the
battery and the inlet manifold on the
engine, always disconnect the negative
(–) battery lead first and reconnect it last.

Battery

• The nut on the battery clamp should
be tightened to a torque of 10 Nm.

Correct position for battery clamp

IB3131

NOTICE

95_U S_M 07.book Page 201 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Car care and technical information

Drive belts
WARNING

IB929

• Keep hands and clothing clear of drive
belts when engine is running.
• Always stop the engine before
inspecting drive belt.
• The radiator fan is electric and can
start even when the engine is
switched off.

Routing of the drive belt

NOTICE
Serious damage can be done to the car’s
electrical system if an alternator lead is
disconnected while the engine is running.

The alternator is situated on the right-hand
side of the engine, adjacent to the bulkhead.
It is driven via a Poly-V-belt from the crankshaft pulley.
The Poly-V-belt also drives the water pump,
the A/C compressor and the steering servo
pump.
The belt tension is critical and is adjusted
automatically by the belt tensioner.
See also page 59, ”Warning, charging”.

201

95_U S_M 07.book Page 202 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

202

Car care and technical information

Wipers and washers

IB506

Check and clean all wiper blades regularly.
If poor wiper performance is experienced,
clean the windshield with a quality glass
cleaner.This is particularly important if the
car has been through an automatic car
wash, as these sometimes leave a wax
coating on the windshield.
If wiper performance is still unsatisfactory,
fit new blades.

Cleaning/adjusting the washer jets

Changing the windshield wiper
blades
Lift the wiper arm off the windshield
1 Depress the catch.
2 Pull the complete blade assembly down
to free it from the wiper arm, and then lift
it off the arm.

Washer jets
The washer jets can be adjusted and, if
necessary, unclogged by means of a pin.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 203 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Car care and technical information

203

Washers

Washer-fluid filler cap

IB1783

IB1784

The washer-fluid reservoir holds 6.4 quarts
(6 liters). When
"Washer fluid level low.
Refill."
comes up on the SID, the reservoir is down
to about 1 quart (1 liter) of fluid. Add at least
50 % of washer- fluid to water to prevent
freezing and for effective cleaning.

WARNING
Take care not to spill washer fluid
concentrate onto hot surfaces. Washer
fluid concentrate contains flammable
ingredients such as alcohol.

The headlights have high-pressure
washers 3

95_U S_M 07.book Page 204 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

204

Car care and technical information

Changing bulbs
WARNING
Before changing a bulb in the engine bay,
switch off the engine to avoid danger of
fingers and hands being injured by
moving parts.
The radiator fan can start up even when
the engine is switched off.
Xenon headlights 3 are high voltage
and must therefore be changed at a
workshop. We recommend that you
contact an authorized Saab workshop. Work involving high-voltage
components is potentially lethal.

NOTICE
• Since the headlight lenses are made
of plastic, rinse dried-on dirt with
water and allow it time to soften up
before cleaning the lenses. Avoid
rubbing the lenses when dry and
never use solvents.
• Use de-icer spray instead of scraping
the ice off.

Check that the new bulb is working when finished.
Use only "Long Life" bulbs.
Headlight aiming, see page 247.

NOTICE
• Do not fit bulbs with a higher rating
than 55 W, since the headlight reflector and the wiring of the car are not
designed for a higher wattage.
• Switch off the ignition before changing a bulb, to avoid possible short-circuiting.
• Do not touch the glass of the bulbs
with your fingers. The oil on your skin
can shorten the life of the bulb.

Xenon headlight 3
Xenon headlights produce roughly twice as
much light as halogen bulbs and have a significantly longer service life.
The lamp units consist of a gas discharge
lamp containing xenon. When the lights are
switched on a very high voltage activates
the xenon gas. The lamps soon reach full
intensity.
Cars with xenon headlights have automatic
levelling. The levelling system comprises
two sensors on the front axle, one on the
rear axle and a control unit under the headlight housing. Headlight alignment is regulated automatically to prevent dazzling
oncoming traffic. Alignment is also adjusted
during braking.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 205 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Headlight bulb for high beam (Halogen)
On cars equipped with Xenon lamps the Halogen lamps are used
only for high beam flasher if the daytime running lights are deactivated and the headlight switch is in the off position (otherwise Xenon
lamp is utilized):
1 Remove the cover from the back of the lamp unit. To improve
accessibility to the right-hand side, hold back the induction air
hose. To improve accessibility to the left-hand side, remove the
battery cover. Release the two clips along the long sides of the
cover.
2 Hold the connector and move the bulb up and down slightly while
pulling it out.
3 Detach the connector from the bulb.
4 Fit the new bulb in the connector without touching the lens with
fingers.
5 Align and fit the bulb in its guide in the reflector by moving it up
and down slightly while pushing it forward.
6 Fit the cover.

IB3895

Car care and technical information

IB3894

205

The three covers of the headlight.
The left-hand cover is for the direction indicator. Replacement of
this bulb should be carried out by a workshop. We recommend
that you contact an authorized Saab workshop.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 206 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Car care and technical information

206

Low beam bulb 3

IB3896

On certain variants the low beam bulb is fitted in the same way as
the high beam bulb, without spring clips, see previous page.

Headlight bulb for low beam (Halogen)

Contact an
authorized
Saab workshop
if a Xenon
headlight
requires
replacement
IB3898

1 Take off the cover from the back of the lamp unit. To improve
accessibility to the right-hand headlight, hold aside the induction
air hose. To improve accessibility to the left-hand headlight,
remove the battery cover. Release the two clips along the long
sides of the cover.
2 Unplug the connector.
3 To remove the spring clip, push it in and then move it to the right.
4 Remove the bulb.
5 Without touching the glass with your fingers, insert the new bulb.
6 Line up the bulb with the guide in the reflector and secure it with
the spring clip.
7 Plug in the connector.
8 Fit the cover.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 207 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Car care and technical information

207

Front direction indicator

Parking-light bulb

Parking-light bulb
The parking light bulb is situated in the lower
edge of the lamp housing.
The bulb holder has been extended to facilitate replacement.
1 Pull the extended bulb holder straight
out.
2 Change the bulb.
3 Make sure that the O-ring is correctly
positioned so as to seal against the lamp
housing.
When the bulb holder is slid in, it does
not matter which direction the bulb
holder grip is held.

IB3901

IB3899

Direction indicator bulb replacement should
be carried out by a workshop.
We recommend that you contact an authorized Saab dealer.

Front fog lights

Front fog lights 3
WARNING
Never crawl under a car that is supported
only by a jack. Always use axle stands.
Refer to the information on jacks on page
236.
1 From under the front bumper, grip the
bulb holder and twist counterclockwise.
2 Unplug the connector.
3 Change the bulb.
Refit in the reverse order.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 208 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Car care and technical information

3 1

The bulbs for the lamps in the rear light cluster are accessed from the luggage compartment.
1 Lower the flap (secured with catches).
2 Squeeze the plastic lugs and remove the
bulb holder.
3 The bulb has a bayonet fitting. Press in
the bulb and twist it counterclockwise.
4 Change the bulb.

2
2

IB3907

IB3906

Rear light cluster, 9-5 Sedan

3
5

4
2

Rear light clusters, 9-5 Sedan

Rear light clusters, 9-5 SportCombi

1
2
3
4
5

Direction indicators
Stop lights and taillights
Reversing lights
Rear fog light
High-mounted brake light

IB3908

208

95_U S_M 07.book Page 209 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Car care and technical information

209

Trunk lid light and taillights,
9-5 Sedan

IB518

Before changing bulbs in the trunk, you
must first release the trim at the foot of the
trunk. This involves removing the handle
and the three trim fasteners (studs).
1 Unscrew the handle on the inside of the
tailgate.
2 Using the peg in the top of the screwdriver handle, push in the button in the
center of the studs.
3 Remove the studs.
IB3909

Refitting the trim

Changing bulbs
1 Squeeze together the silver plastic lug
and the electrical connection and withdraw the lamp holder.
2 The bulb has a bayonet fitting. Press in
the bulb and twist it counterclockwise.
3 Change the bulb.

1 Reset the studs by pushing back the
center buttons so that they protrude by
0.2 inch (5 mm).
2 Insert the studs through the trim and tailgate panel. Press the center buttons in,
flush with the collar.
3 Screw the handle back onto the trunk.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 210 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

210

Car care and technical information

High-mounted stop lights,
9-5 Sedan
The bulbs can be accessed after the panel
in the rear headlining has been removed.

IB3911

1
IB519

1 Remove the panel by carefully pushing
in the two clips, one at the time.
2 Release the bulb holder, which is
retained by a clip at either end.
3 Withdraw the bulb gently straight back.
4 Push in the new bulb.
5 Refit the bulb holder.
6 Replace the panel by carefully pushing
the panel towards the headlining so that
the two clips engage their respective
slot.

High-mounted stop lights
1 Panel
2 Retaining clips
3 Bulbs

Rear lights clusters,
9-5 SportCombi
1 Open the tailgate.
2 Remove the two screws securing the
light cluster to the body.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 211 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

IB3913

IB3912

Car care and technical information

Reassembly:
3 Remove the two screws securing the
light cluster to the body.
4 Pull the light cluster rearwards and
angle it outwards (it is seated quite
firmly).
5 Release the fastener from the body.
Reinsert the fastener into the groove in
the light cluster. Press in the fastener
until you hear a click.
6 Take out the bulb holder.
7 Press in the bulb and twist it counterclockwise.
8 Change the bulb.
9 Check that the new bulb works.

1 Align the fastener with the hole in the
body.
2 Press the lamp unit home into the body
until you hear a click.
3 Fit the screws.

211

95_U S_M 07.book Page 212 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

212

Car care and technical information

Reassembly:
1 Place the two ”hinges” in the recess in
the tailgate.
2 Then push the ”hinges” into the recess
and close the cover.
3 Turn the lock a quarter turn.

IB3915

1 Turn the lock a quarter turn (90°) with a
screwdriver or the ignition key.
2 Open and remove the cover.
3 Remove the bulb holder by pressing the
plastic lug to the side.
4 Press in the bulb and twist it
counterclockwise.
5 Change the bulb.
6 Check that the new bulb is working.

IB3914

Tailgate bulbs, 9-5 SportCombi

95_U S_M 07.book Page 213 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

License-plate light

Side direction indicators

The lens is not screwed in place. It is held in
place with snaps.

1 Slide the lamp fitting forward and pull out
the back.
2 Remove the bulb.
3 Change the bulb.
On refitting, make sure that the spring in the
lamp fitting engages the edge of the opening in the body panel.

1 One of the short sides of the lens contains a recess for a small screwdriver.
Insert a screwdriver and prise out the
lens.
2 Fit the new bulb.
3 When refitting the lens, the short side
without the screwdriver recess should
be inserted first.

213

IB522

IB3922

Car care and technical information

Courtesy lights (front doors and
floor) and luggage-compartment
lighting
1 Insert a screwdriver carefully into the
slot in the end of the lamp fitting. Ease
the fitting off to gain access to the bulb.
2 Bend out one of the contacts and
remove the bulb.
3 Change the bulb.
On refitting, insert the connector-end of the
lamp fitting first.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 214 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Dome light, front
1 Ease the leading edge of the glass out
of the overhead panel.
2 Release one of the contacts and remove
the bulb.
3 Fit the new bulb.

IB524

IB525

Car care and technical information

IB523

214

Dome light, rear
1 Remove the entire overhead panel:
ease out the trailing end first, and then
both front edges.
2 Fit the new bulb.

Glove-compartment illumination
1 Insert a small screwdriver in the slot in
the end of the lamp fitting and ease it out
to gain access to the bulb.
2 Bend out one of the contacts and
remove the bulb.
3 Fit the new bulb.
On refitting, insert the connector-end of the
lamp fitting first.

Other bulbs
If any other bulbs need changing, you are
advised to take the car to a workshop. We
recommend that you contact an authorized
Saab dealer.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 215 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

215
1

Car care and technical information
Bulb table

#
1
2
3

Cap
H7
H8
P21W

Wattage
55
Headlight
35
Fog light
21
Reversing lamp; rear fog lamp; rear direction indicator
4 P21/5W 21/5
Stop/tail lamp
5 R10W 10
Dome light; courtesy lights; glove compartment; luggage compartment
6 R5W
5
Safety belt reminder; license-plate lighting
7 Xenon 6
Reading light, overhead panel
w9U
8 T4W
4
Reading light, rear
9 WY5W/ 5
Side indicators (yellow);/ high-mounted
W5W
stop light (9-5 Sedan); parking lights
10 W2W
1.2
Switches

NOTICE
Only fit lamps of the specified rating. Lamps of the wrong wattage
could damage the wiring harness and electronics.

10
IB4095

A special kit containing spare bulbs and fuses is available as an
accessory from your Saab dealer. A storage space for this is provided adjacent to the toolkit and jack, under the panel in the luggage
compartment.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 216 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

216

Car care and technical information

Fuses

• Always consult a workshop before
modifying or adding any electrical
equipment. We recommend that you
contact an authorized Saab dealer.
Failure to do so can result in the electrical system being damaged.
• Never replace a fuse with one having
a higher/lower rating than specified
(see page 218). The color of the fuse
indicates its amperage.
• If the same fuse blows repeatedly,
have the electrical system checked by
a workshop. We recommend that you
contact an authorized Saab dealer.

Sound fuse / Blown fuse
The fuses are housed in two fuse panels:
one at the end of the instrument panel on the
driver’s side, and one under the hood.
To check if a fuse has blown, first remove it
from the panel (see below). If the filament is
broken, the fuse has blown.
A special tool for removing fuses is provided
at the bottom of the fuse panel at the end of
the instrument panel. Simply push the tool
onto the fuse, squeeze and remove the
fuse.

IB527

To avoid the risk of short-circuiting and/or
fire breaking out in the electrical system,
the following advice should be heeded:

IB144

WARNING

Fuse panel in instrument panel

Fuse box under the hood

IB1794

• If a MAXI fuse blows, it means that
there is a major fault in the electrical
system. Have the car checked by a
workshop. We recommend that you
contact an authorized Saab dealer.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 217 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Car care and technical information
NOTICE
If a Maxi fuse blows, it means that there is
a major fault in the electrical system.
Have the car checked without delay by a
workshop. We recommend that you contact an authorized Saab dealer.

IB1795

DICE / TWICE

Maxi fuses under the hood

DICE = Dashboard Integrated Central Electronics
TWICE = Theft-Warning Central Electronics
DICE and TWICE are electronic control
modules that monitor and control a variety
of functions:

Maxi fuses
The Maxi fuses are housed in the fuse box
under the hood. These fuses can be
checked in the same way as the other fuses.
The Maxi fuses are designed to protect the
car’s electrical system from being damaged. Each Maxi fuse protects a number of
electrical circuits and functions and therefore has a higher rating (amperage) than the
standard fuses. No spare Maxi fuses are
supplied with the car.

DICE controls (among other things):
• Front lights and interior lighting
• Instrument illumination
• Intermittent wiper operation
• Electric heating of rear window and door
mirrors
• Cooling fans

217

TWICE controls (among other things):
• Central locking.
• Car alarm (Anti-theft system)
• Engine immobilizer
• Autochecking of lights.
• Electric heating of rear seat
• Safety belt reminder
• Electrically adjustable passenger seat
The DICE and TWICE control modules are
linked to a data bus, which is basically an
information carrier that allows information to
be exchanged between all the control modules and components connected to the bus.
If a fault occurs in any of these components,
diagnostic faults codes are set in the relevant control module, which facilitates fault
diagnosis. We recommend that you contact
an authorized Saab dealer.
The scan tool connector for fault diagnosis
is located under the instrument panel on the
drivers side.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 218 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Car care and technical information
6B

AB C 1 2

16B 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25 26 27 28 29 30 31

Trailer lights

Automatic transmission

C
1

Trunk lighting; trunk lock; door lighting; parking
assistant 3; SID

Audio System; CD changer 3

Heating, rear seat 3; moonroof 3, remote control
receiver

Electrically adjusted passenger seat 3

7.5 Automatic transmission 3

Audio System, amplifier

Ignition system, engine

Fuel pump

DICE (direction indicators)

16B

–

OnStar 3

Engine-management system; main instrument;
DICE/TWICE

Door-mirror heating; rear-window heating

OnStar 3; Telematics 3

ACC; interior lighting; rear fog light; high beam flasher

Brake lights; Park Brake Shift Lock (cars with automatic transmission)

Audio System; rear-view mirror; load angle sensor 3;
navigation 3; Cruise Control 3

7.5 Electric door mirrors; DICE: manual beam length
adjustment 3
15

37 38 39
IB2439

Engine injectors

Amp Function

32 33 34 35 36

Fuse panel in instrument panel
#

7.5 Brake lights, trailer

7
5 6

6B 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

218

Reversing lights

Interior fan

Parking lights and taillights, left

Central locking; navigation 3; door mirror memory 3

Parking lights and taillights, right

Main light switch

Electrically adjustable driver’s seat

5
6

7.5 DICE / TWICE
30

Electric windows, right; trailer charging

95_U S_M 07.book Page 219 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

219

7,5 Driver seat memory 3; mirrors memory 3;
moonroof 3; parking assistant 3; seatbelt reminder;
ACC
10

A
B C1 C2

Engine-management system; SID; main instrument

7.5 Airbag

7.5 ABS/ESP®

7.5 Starter motor; transmission control module (cars with
automatic transmission)

7.5 Cruise control 3; water valve; fog lights, front 3; rain
sensor 3

–

7.5 Direction-indicator switch

D
G

L1 L2

–

12-volt socket (cigarette lighter) front/rear

Daytime running light

Electric windows, left

Windshield wipers

Electric heating, front seats 3

Limp-home solenoid

IB3916

Car care and technical information

Relay panel under instrument panel
#

Function

–

Electric heating of rear seat

–

Main relay (engine management system)

–

Fuel pump

Ignition switch

Rear-window / door mirrors heating

95_U S_M 07.book Page 220 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Car care and technical information
–
Starter relay

Limp-home function

–

2
1

4
6

5
1

IB1797

J
K

220

Fuse box under hood
Fuses
#

Amp Function

Radiator fan, high speed

ABS/ESP®

7.5

Load angle sensor (cars with xenon headlights)

Heater

A/C; car alarm siren

Bulb test

–

Headlight washers

95_U S_M 07.book Page 221 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

221

Car care and technical information

High beam headlight, left

Relays

Low beam headlight left

Function
Bulb test; head light; high beam flasher

High beam headlight, right

Low beam headlight, right

Headlight washer
Front fog lights

Radiator fan, high speed

Fog lights (front spoiler)

Wiper, rear (9-5 SportCombi)
–

Wiper, rear

Horn

–

Rain sensor

Radiator fan, low speed

Radiator fan, high speed

–

A/C-compressor

Radiator fan, high speed, right fan

Horn

Extra lights (accessory)

High beam headlight

Low beam headlight

–

Windshield wipers

95_U S_M 07.book Page 222 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

222

Car care and technical information

Tires

Inflation - Tire Pressure

Your new vehicle comes with high-quality
tires made by a leading tire manufacturer. If
you ever have questions about your tire
warranty and where to obtain service, see
your Saab Warranty and Service Record
Booklet for details.

WARNING
Poorly maintained and improperly used
tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an blow-out
and a serious accident. See “Loading
Your Vehicle” on page 231.
• Underinflated tires pose the same
danger as overloaded tires. The
resulting accident could cause serious
injury. Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended pressure.
Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact – such as when you hit a pothole. Keep tires at the recommended
pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.

The Tire-Loading Information label shows
the correct inflation pressures for your tires
when they’re cold. “Cold” means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours
or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Notice: Don’t let anyone tell you that
underinflation or overinflation is all
right. It’s not. If your tires don’t have
enough air (underinflation), you can get
the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•

Too much flexing
Too much heat
Tire overloading
Bad wear
Bad handling
Bad fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (overinflation), you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Bad handling
• Rough ride
Needless damage from road hazards

Adjust the tire pressure to match the current
load and speed of the car (see page 267).
The stated tire pressures apply to cold tires,
i.e. tires that are the same temperature as
the outside air temperature. Tire pressure
increases as the tires become warm (e.g.
during highway driving) by approximately
0.3 bar (4 psi). When the temperature of the
tires changes by 50°F (10°C), the tire pressure will change 0.1 bar (2 psi).
Never reduce the pressure of a hot tire. If the
tires are hot when you check them, only
increase the pressure, if necessary.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 223 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Car care and technical information
High speed operation
WARNING
Driving at high speeds, 100 mph
(160 km/h) or higher, puts an additional
strain on tires.
Sustained high-speed driving causes
excessive heat build up and can cause
sudden tire failure. You could have a
crash and you or others could be killed.
Some high-speed rated tires require inflation pressure adjustment for high speed
operation. When speed limits and road
conditions are such that a vehicle can be
driven at high speeds, make sure the tires
are rated for high speed operation, in
excellent condition, and set to the correct
cold tire inflation pressure for the vehicle
load.

When to check
Check your tires once a month or more.
Don’t forget your compact spare tire. It
should be at 60 psi (420 kPa).

223

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the
front and rear inflation pressures as shown
on the Tire-Loading Information label. Make
certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened. See page 238.

How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. You can’t tell if your
tires are properly inflated simply by looking
at them. Radial tires may look properly
inflated even when they’re underinflated.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the
valve stems. They help prevent leaks by
keeping out dirt and moisture.

Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 10,000 miles
(16 000 km).
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate
your tires as soon as possible and check
wheel alignment. Also check for damaged
tires or wheels. See “When It Is Time for
New Tires” on page 224 and “Wheel
Replacement” on page 227 for more information.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve
more uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation is the most important.
When rotating your tires, always use the
correct rotation pattern. Left front tire to left
rear. Left rear tire to right front. Right front to
right rear. Right rear to left front.
Don’t include the compact spare tire in your
tire rotation.

WARNING
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel
could come off and cause an accident.
When you change a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the wheel
attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency,
you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do
this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire
brush later, if you need to, to get all the
rust or dirt off. See “Changing a wheel” on
page 236.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 224 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Car care and technical information

Flat spotting

When It Is Time for New Tires

All tires get hot, especially on long journeys
or when the car is driven hard. After the car
has been parked with hot tires and the tires
have cooled down, a flat spot can form in the
tire, where it is in contact with the ground.
The same can occur if the car has not been
moved for a long time.
Flat spots can cause vibration that can be
felt through the steering wheel, similar to
that experienced when the wheels need balancing.
Flat spots of this type disappear once the
tires get hot again, usually after 10–15 miles
(20–25 km) of driving at cruising speed.

One way to tell when it’s time for new tires is
to check the treadwear indicators, which will
appear when your tires have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread remaining.
You need a new tire if any of the following
statements are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or
more places around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing
through the tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or
snagged deep enough to show cord or
fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut or other
damage that can’t be repaired well
because of the size or location of the
damage.

SG840

224

Wear indicators

Treadwear indicators
The tires incorporate wear indicators in the
form of smooth, treadless strips across the
width, which become visible when only
2/32" (1.6 mm) of tread remains. As soon as
the indicators become visible, new tires
should be fitted without delay.
Make sure you are familiar with the legal
limit for minimum tread depth in your
country and also any regulations governing the use of winter (snow) tires.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 225 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Car care and technical information

225

Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you
need, look at the Tire-Loading Information
label.
Before changing to wheels/tires of another
size, we recommend that you contact an
authorized Saab workshop regarding
acceptable options. See also page 266
Wheels/tires combinations that are not
approved by the vehicle manufacturer can
negatively affect the car’s directional stability, steering and braking in both wet and dry
conditions.
The wheels and tires have been carefully
matched to the characteristics of the car and
play a key role in its outstanding roadholding and handling.
Do not take it for granted that a wheel/tire
combination will work in the best possible
way, just because it can be fitted to the car.
To ensure that the speedometer is as accurate as possible it should be reprogrammed
if wheels of a different dimension are fitted.
Contact a Saab dealer.
Because of front wheel drive, the front tires
tend to wear faster than the rear ones. New
tires should always be fitted in pairs, so that
tires on the same axle have the same
amount of tread.
Store wheels lying flat or hanging – never
standing upright.

NOTICE
Wide wheels and tires with sidewalls that
are too low can:
• be damaged in potholes etc.
• cause springs, shock absorbers and
wheel bearings and body mountings
can be overloaded.
• cause the wheels to come into contact
with chassis and body components.
• can affect the function of the Electronic Stability Program (ESP® ).
The speed and load limits for the tires
must not be exceeded; see page 230.
Wheels larger than 17” must not be fitted.
The maximum permissible offset is
49 mm.

WARNING
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes or types (radial and bias-belted
tires), the vehicle may not handle properly, and you could have a crash. Using
tires of different sizes may also cause
damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use
the same size and type tires on all wheels.
It’s all right to drive with your compact
spare temporarily, it was developed for
use on your vehicle. See “Compact spare
tire” on page 234.

WARNING
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,
the wheel rim flanges could develop
cracks after many miles of driving. A tire
and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing
a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the
wheels on your vehicle.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 226 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

226

Car care and technical information

Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
The following information relates to the
system developed by the United States
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This
applies only to vehicles sold in the United
States.) The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does not
apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12
inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary
with respect to these grades, they must also
conform to federal safety requirements and
additional General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.

Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative
rating based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions on
a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due
to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance. Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire
is based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.

Temperature – A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest),
B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance
to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on
the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire
is established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination, can
cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 227 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Car care and technical information
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give
you the longest tire life and best overall performance.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are not needed. However, if you
notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment may
need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth road,
your wheels may need to be rebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or
badly rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep
coming loose, the wheel, wheel bolts and
wheel nuts should be replaced. If the wheel
leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions
exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you
need.
Each new wheel should have the same
load-carrying capacity, diameter, width,
offset and be mounted the same way as the
one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels,
wheel bolts or wheel nuts, replace them only
with new Saab original equipment parts.
This way, you will be sure to have the right
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your
vehicle.

227

Used Replacement Wheels

WARNING
WARNING
Using the wrong replacement wheels,
wheel bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle
can be dangerous. It could affect the
braking and handling of your vehicle,
make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in
which you or others could be injured.
Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts
and wheel nuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause
problems with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire
chain clearance to the body and chassis.
See “Changing a wheel” on page 236.

WARNING
When fitting just one new pair of tires,
these should be fitted to the rear wheels,
as these are more critical to the directional stability of the car (e.g. on braking
or in a skid). The existing rear wheels
should therefore be moved to the front.

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been
used or how far it’s been driven. It could
fail suddenly and cause a crash. If you
have to replace a wheel, use a new GM
original equipment wheel.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 228 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

228

Car care and technical information

Tire Chains
WARNING
If your vehicle has 225/45 R17 alt. 235/45
R17 size tires, don’t use tire chains,
there’s not enough clearance.
Tire chains used on a vehicle without the
proper amount of clearance can cause
damage to the brakes, suspension or
other vehicle parts. The area damaged by
the tire chains could cause you to lose
control of your vehicle and you or others
may be injured in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only if
its manufacturer recommends it for use
on your vehicle and tire size combination
and road conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s instructions. To help avoid
damage to your vehicle, drive slowly,
readjust or remove the device if it’s contacting your vehicle, and don’t spin your
wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit,
install them on the front tires.

Notice: If your vehicle does not have
225/45R17 alt. 235/45 R17 size tires, use
tire chains only where legal and only
when you must. Contact your Saab
dealer regarding suitable snow chains.
Install them on the front tires and tighten
them as tightly as possible with the ends
securely fastened. Drive slowly and
follow the chain manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten
them. If the contact continues, slow
down until it stops. Driving too fast or
spinning the wheels with chains on will
damage your vehicle.

If a Tire Goes Flat
It’s unusual for a tire to “blow-out” while
you’re driving, especially if you maintain
your tires properly. If air goes out of a tire,
it’s much more likely to leak out slowly. But
if you should ever have a “blow-out”, here
are a few tips about what to expect and what
to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a
drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side.
Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and
grip the steering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blow-out, particularly on a curve, acts
much like a skid and may require the same
correction you’d use in a skid. In any rear
blowout, remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go.
It may be very bumpy and noisy, but you can
still steer. Gently brake to a stop – well off
the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to
use your jacking equipment to change a flat
tire safely.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 229 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Car care and technical information
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded
into it´s sidewall.
Tire size: The tire size ia a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular tire´s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type and service description.
Department of Transportation (DOT):
The Department of Transportation (DOT)
code indicates that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation
Motor Vehicle Safety standards.
Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and numbers following DOT code are
the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The
TIN shows the manufacturer and plant
code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides
of the tire.
Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under
the tread.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):
Tire manufacturers are required to grade
tires based on performance factors: treadwear, traction and temperature resistance.
For more information see “Uniform Tire
Quality Grading” on page 226.
Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load.
For information on recommended tire pressure see “Lowest recommended tire pressure, cold tires” on page 267and “Loading
Your Vehicle” on page 231.

229

Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example
of a typical passenger car tire size.
215 / 55

a
b
c
d
e
f

Tire Width
Aspect Ratio
Belt Rating
Rim diameter
Load range
Speed rating

Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the tire section width in millimeters
from sidewall to sidewall.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 230 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

230

Car care and technical information

Aspect ratio: A two-digit number that indicates the tire height-to-width measurements. For example, if the tire size aspect
ratio is “55”, as shown in item “C” of the illustration, it would mean that the tire´s sidewall
is 55% as high as it is wide.
Belt Rating: A letter code is used to indicate
the type of ply construction in the tire. The
letter “R” means radial ply construction; the
letter “D” means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter “B” means
belted-bias ply construction.
Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
Load range: The load range represents the
load carry capacity a tire is certified to carry.
Speed Rating: The maximum speed that a
tire is certified to carry a load. Speed ratings
range from “A” to “Z”.

Tire markings
An example of the meaning of the different
markings in a tire size is given below for a
tire size of:
215/55 R16 93 V
215 Tire section width, mm
55 Aspect ratio, i.e. the section height
is 55 % of the section width
R Radial ply
16 Wheel rim diameter 16 in at bead
seats
93 Tire load code
V Speed marking
Tire load index
91 Tire approved for max. 1355 lbs.
(615 kg)
93 Max. 1433 lbs (650 kg)
94 Max. 1477 lbs (670 kg)
Speed ratings
Q Tire approved for speeds up to
100 mph (160 km/h)
S Max. 112 mph (180 km/h)
T Max. 118 mph (190 km/h)
H Max. 130 mph (210 km/h)
V Max. 150 mph (240 km/h)
W Max. 167 mph (270 km/h)
Y Max. 186 mph (300 km/h)

TIN-code
a Manufacturer´s Identification Mark
b Tire Size
c Tire Type Code
d Date of Manufacture

95_U S_M 07.book Page 231 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Car care and technical information
Loading Your Vehicle

This label can only be found on vehicles
sold in the U.S.
Vehicles sold in Canada have the tire
information label in the glovebox, see
page 268.
This is an example of what your vehicle´s
Tire-Loading Information/Certification label
might look like. It is located on the B-pillar
and shows how much weight your vehicle
may properly carry. The label tells you the
proper size, and recommended inflation
pressures for the tires on your vehicle. It
also gives you important information about
the number of people that can be in your
vehicle and the total weight that you can
carry. This weight is called the Vehicle
Capacity Weight, and includes the weight of
all occupants, cargo and all nonfactory-installed options.

Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the
tire pressing outward on each square inch of
the tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds
per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight of optional accessories, for
example, automatic transmission, power
steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, radio and air conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire´s
height to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the tread.
Cords may be made from steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
alternate angles substantially less than 90
degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air
pressure in a tire, measured in pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa), before
a tire have built up heat from driving. See
“Inflation - Tire Pressure” on page 222.
Curb weight: This means the weight of a
motor vehicle with standard and optional
equipment including the maximum capacity
of fuel, oil and coolant, without passengers
and cargo.

231

DOT Markings: A code molded into the
sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire is in
compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code includes the Tire
Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator which can also identify the
tire manufacturer, production plant, brand
and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating see
“Loading Your Vehicle” on page 231.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for
the front axle, see “Loading Your Vehicle”
on page 231.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for
the rear axle, see “Loading Your Vehicle” on
page 231.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of
an asymmetrical tire that must always face
outward when mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air
pressure. There are 6.9 kPa to one psi.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used
on light duty trucks and some multipurpose
passenger vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging
from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load
carrying capacity of a tire.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 232 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

232

Car care and technical information

Maximum Load rating: The load rating for
a tire at the maximum permissible inflation
pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The
sum of curb weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight; and production options
weight.
Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure: The maximum cold inflation pressure
to which a tire may be inflated.
Normal occupant weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multipled by 150 pounds (68 kg). See “Loading
Your Vehicle” on page 231.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of a
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side
that faces outward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire that contains a whitewall bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand and or model name molding on
the other sidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks
and multipurpose vehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle manufacturer´s recommended tire inflation pressure shown on the tire label, see
“Inflation - Tire Pressure” on page 222 and
“Loading Your Vehicle” on page 231.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which
the ply cords that extend to the beads are
laid at substantially 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire or a tire and
tube assembly upon which the tire beads
are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the
tread and the bead.
Speed rating: An alphanumeric code
assigned to a tire indicating the maximum
speed at which a tire can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and
the road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands,
sometimes called “wear bars”, that show
across the tread of a tire when only
2/32 inch of tread remains. See “When It Is
Time for New Tires” on page 224.

Tread Width: The width of the tire´s tread.
UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality Grade Standards, a tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire´s
traction, temperature and treadwear. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers
using government testing procedures. The
rating are molded into the sidewall of the
tire. See “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” on
page 226.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: Is the number of
designated seating positions multipled by
150 pounds (68 kg) plus the rated cargo
load. See “Loading Your Vehicle” on
page 231.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load
on an individual tire due to curb weight,
accessory weight, occupant weight and
cargo weight.
Vehicle label: A label permanently
attached to a vehicle showing original
equipment tire size and the recommended
cold inflation pressure. See “Loading Your
Vehicle” on page 231.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 233 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Car care and technical information
Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit
1 Locate the statement “The
combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed
XXX pounds” on your vehicle´s
label.
2 Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3 Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from
XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the
“XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers
in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400–750 (5x150) =
650 lbs.).

5 Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

233

Winter tires
Winter (snow) tires are recommended for
winter climates where the majority of your
driving will be done on snow and ice. Winter
tires should be fitted to all four wheels to
maintain a proper balance. Your Saab
dealer can advise you of to the correct size
tire for your car (if different from the original
size) and also supply Saab approved winter
tires pre-mounted on steel or alloy rims.
Winter tires normally use a different speed
rating compared to summer/all season tires.
Make sure not to exceed the stated speed
rating on the tires you use.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 234 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

234

Car care and technical information

Tire date code

the spare-wheel well under the luggagecompartment floor.
Have the standard tire repaired and refitted
as soon as possible.

Tires should be regarded as perishable
goods. As the tires age, the rubber becomes
progressively harder, and the roadholding
ability of the tires diminishes. This is particularly true on winter tires.
Tires now have a date-code marking for the
year of manufacture. The first two digits
denote the week number and the two last
digits the year followed by a filled triangle.
IB3233

NOTICE

Spare wheel (under panel in luggage
compartment)

Compact spare tire
WARNING
Stow all tools carefully away after use, so
that they cannot get loose and cause
injury in the event of a crash.
The compact spare is light and easy to
handle when changing the tire. Its use is
only permitted when a standard tire has sustained a puncture. The maximum life of the
tire is only 2000 miles (3,500 km).
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) with the
compact spare fitted.
The compact spare should be inflated to
60 psi (420 kPa). Carry the punctured tire in

To avoid damaging a punctured alloy
wheel it can be placed outside up in the
spare-wheel well but only while driving to
the closest dealer.
A general rule is that all heavy loads must
be well secured in the luggage compartment, see page 131 and 135.
The spare tire, together with the jack, front
towrope attachment eye and toolkit, is
stowed away underneath the luggage-compartment floor.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 235 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Car care and technical information

WARNING
• Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) as
the tire can overheat and adversely
affect the handling of the car.
• Tire pressure: refer to page 267.
• The spare wheel or punctured tire
must be stowed under the trunk floor,
and secured in place with the retaining
nut.

The following should be observed when the
compact spare wheel (T115/70 R16) is
fitted:
• The compact spare is light and easy to
handle when changing the wheel.
• Do not drive further than necessary with
the compact spare fitted – the maximum
life of the wheel is only just over
2000 miles (3,500 km).
• Refit the standard tire as soon as possible.
Important considerations when driving with
a compact spare tire:
• The car’s ground clearance is reduced.
• The car must not be driven with more than
one compact tire at a time.
• Avoid driving against a curb.
• Do not use snow chains.
• Do not fit the wheel cover - this would conceal the warning text.

IB3234

Driving considerations with
compact spare wheel/tire fitted

235

Hanging up the cover, 9-5 SportCombi

95_U S_M 07.book Page 236 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

236

Car care and technical information

Changing a wheel
WARNING
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous
without the appropriate safety equipment
and training. The jack provided with your
vehicle is designed only for changing a
flat tire. If it is used for anything else, you
or others could be badly injured or killed if
the vehicle slips off the jack. Use the jack
provided with your vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The
vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over
or fall on you or other people. You and
they could be badly injured or even killed.
Find a level place to change your tire. To
help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1 Set the parking brake firmly.
2 If you have an automatic transmission, put the shift lever in PARK (P).
For a manual transmission, leave the
car in gear (1st or REVERSE (R)).
3 Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
4 Do not allow passengers to remain in
the vehicle.

To be even more certain the vehicle won't
move, you should put blocks at the front
and rear of the tire farthest away from the
one being changed. That would be the
tire, on the other side, at the opposite end
of the vehicle.
• The car jack is designed solely for use
in changing a wheel or fitting snow
chains. It must not be used to support the car during repair work or
servicing.
• Never crawl under a car that is
supported only by a jack.
• Raising your vehicle too high or with
the jack improperly positioned can
damage the vehicle and even make
the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to
fit the jack lift head into the proper
location before raising the vehicle, and
raise the vehicle only far enough off
the ground so there is enough room
for the spare tire to fit (no more than
25 mm or 1 inch clearance between
the ground and the bottom of the tire).
• Switch on the hazard warning lights if
the car is on a road.

• The jack should be stored correctly
under the carpeting in the trunk. If it
lies loose in the car, it could thrown forward and cause personal injury in the
event of a crash or if the car rolls over.
• Grit, salt and rust can clog the inner
threads of the wheel bolts if the car has
been driven for several years exclusively with alloy wheels.
If steel wheels are being installed, the
bolt hole threads in the brake hubs
should be cleaned before the thinner
steel wheels are fitted. It may otherwise not be possible to achieve the
correct clamping force, despite tightening the wheel bolts to the correct
torque.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 237 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

IB1130

Jacking points for a floor jack
To jack up the car, apply the jack to one of
the special jacking points under the sills.
If a floor jack is used, it can be applied to the
standard jacking points used by the dealer.
A floor jack can lift both front wheels or both
rear wheels off the ground simultaneously.
A jack stand must then be applied underneath the front of the engine subframe (at
the fixing point for the towrope-attachment
eye) or to the rear towrope-attachment eye
(or under the trailer hitch, if fitted).

237

IB3917

Car care and technical information

Position for jack

NOTICE
Apply the jack only to the jacking points
indicated on the body.
1 Put the car in 1st gear (automatic transmission: move selector to the P position)
and apply the parking brake.
2 Wind the jack up to a suitable height
before placing it under the recess in the
sill.
Make sure that the jack fully engages
the recess in the sill and that the base of
the jack is steady and flat on the ground.

3 Remove the wheel cover (where applicable).
Remove the wheel bolt caps and loosen
the wheel bolts by half a turn.
4 Wind the jack to raise the wheel clear of
the ground. Remove the wheel bolts and
lift off the wheel.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 238 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

IB2428

Car care and technical information

IB4529

238

Removing the plastic wheel bolt caps
5 Clean any rust or dirt from the contact
surfaces between the wheel and brake
disc. Do not wipe away the grease in the
hub.
6 Fit the wheel and screw in the bolts in the
sequence shown (opposite pairs) - see
page 239.
Tighten the bolts enough for the bolts
and wheel to be seated correctly.
7 Lower the car and tighten the wheel
bolts to the correct torque in the
sequence shown (opposite
pairs).Replace the wheel bolt caps.
Tightening torque
Light-alloy wheels: 80 ft.lbs. (110 Nm)
Steel wheels: 80 ft.lbs. (110 Nm).

Clean any rust or dirt from the contact surfaces between the wheel and brake disc

NOTICE
• When refitting wheel covers (where
applicable), make sure that the valve
protrudes through the marked hole in
the wheel cover.
• Do not overtighten the bolts using an
impact wrench: not only can this
damage the wheels but it can also
make it impossible to undo the bolts
using the wheel wrench in the car’s
toolkit.

Do not wipe away the grease in the hub.

8 Check-tighten the wheel bolts after a
few miles.
Tightening torque
Light-alloy wheels: 80 ft.lbs. (110 Nm)
Steel wheels: 80 ft.lbs. (110 Nm)

95_U S_M 07.book Page 239 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Car care and technical information

239

Safety belts
WARNING

IB539

IB1800

If the car is involved in a crash, the safety
belts, belt pretensioners and other components must be inspected by a workshop. We recommend that you contact an
authorized Saab dealer.

Tightening sequence, wheel bolts

Removing the wheel cover

Never make any alterations or repairs to
the safety belt yourself.
Regularly check the function of the safety
belts as follows:
• Hold the diagonal strap and pull it sharply.
The safety belt should lock and it should
not be possible to withdraw it further.
Check the anchorage points in the floor.
They must not have suffered rust damage.
There must be no frayed threads in the webbing.
Safety belts must not come into contact with
substances such as polishes, oils or other
chemicals. If the straps are dirty, wash them
with warm water and a detergent or have
them replaced.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 240 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

240

Car care and technical information

Upholstery and trim
To remove lint or hairs from the seat upholstery or headlining, use a moist, lint-free
cloth or a special lint remover (brush or
roller). Remove any dirty marks using a
cloth moistened with lukewarm soapy
water.
When using a stain remover, always work
from the outside towards the center to avoid
leaving a ring. If a soiled ring or spot should
remain, it can usually be removed using
lukewarm soapy water or water alone.
Wet patches left by spilled soft drinks or thin
oil must be wiped off immediately using an
absorbent material, such as a paper towel,
and treated with stain remover.
Alcohol is recommended for removing
grease or oil stains, and a semi-stiff brush
may also be used.

Cleaning and caring for leather
upholstery
The principal reason for treating leather
upholstery is to maintain its elegant appearance and to provide it with a protective film.
Discoloration caused by dust and wear
mainly affects the lighter shades, although
this is not detrimental to the leather –
indeed, the patina resulting from use is often
considered desirable in leather. But if the
leather is allowed to become too grubby, it
can start to look shabby.
It is a good idea to clean and recondition the
leather twice a year – in conjunction with a
general spring-cleaning of the car – after the
winter and in the autumn, for instance. In
hot, dry climates, the leather will need to be
treated more frequently. Use conventional
leather care products. Follow the instructions on the packaging.
Do not use harsh polishing agents, cleaning
agents, sprays, coarse soap or hot water.

Textile carpeting
Vacuum clean the carpeting regularly. Carpets can also be cleaned using a brush, or
carpet shampoo applied with a sponge. Do
not use vacuum cleaners outdoors unless
they are properly grounded.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 241 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Car care and technical information

Washing the car
Wash your car frequently. To facilitate
cleaning, a suitable detergent can be added
to the water, which should be lukewarm.
Saab offers a full line of car care products,
including car wash, for the care of your vehicle. See your dealer for available products
or visit www.saabcatalog.com (U.S. residents only).
Do not use a pressure washer at close
range on stone chip damage, scratches or
other damage to the paintwork. The paint
can otherwise start to flake.
Remove any bird droppings without delay,
as these can discolor the paintwork and
prove difficult to polish out.
Use a soft cloth moistened with methyl alcohol to remove splashes of tar or asphalt. Do
not use strong cleaners, as these can dry
out the paintwork.

NOTICE
Avoid using any alcohol-based cleaners
on the front and rear light clusters, as
these can cause cracking of the lenses.

The underside of the car also needs washing regularly, and this should be done extra
thoroughly at the end of winter. Clean the
underside of the car by hand if the car is usually washed in an automatic car wash without special facilities for underbody cleaning.
Never wash or leave the car to dry in the
sun, but wipe it dry with a chamois leather
immediately after washing to avoid smears
and streaks.
Clean the window glass inside and out using
a high quality window cleaner. This is particularly important when the car is new, as
upholstery and trim have a tendency to
sweat a little at first.
Keep the glass well cleaned, as this helps to
prevent misting.

241

NOTICE
• The door mirrors must be fully
retracted before the car enters an
automatic car wash.
• Remove fixed antennas, e.g. for
mobile phone, before putting car
through an automatic car wash.
• Try your brakes on leaving a car wash.
Wet brake discs may reduce the performance of the brakes.
• Cars with Saab Parking Assistance:
Do not spray the sensors or closer
than 8 in. (20 cm) to the sensors with
a pressure washer, as this can
damage them.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 242 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

242

Car care and technical information

Waxing and polishing

Touching up the paint

Other than in exceptional cases, do not use
abrasive polishes containing a cutting agent
on a new car. Always wash the car thoroughly before waxing or polishing.

Damaged paintwork should be treated as
soon as it is discovered: the longer it is left,
the greater the risk of corrosion. The
anti-perforation warranty does not cover
corrosion resulting from untreated defects.
Paintwork damage sustained in a crash is
usually extensive and can only be properly
restored by professionals.
However, you can repair small scratches
and stone-chip damage yourself. The necessary tools and materials, such as primer,
touch-up paint and brushes, are available
from your Saab dealer.
In the case of minor flaws in the paintwork,
where the metal has not been exposed and
an undamaged layer of paint remains,
touch-up paint can usually be applied
directly, after any dirt has been scraped
away using a pointed knife.

Engine compartment
Clean the engine compartment using an
engine detergent and rinse with hot water.
Cover the headlights. Do not use high-pressure washer. Avoid spraying the hood liner,
as this can become heavy and hang down
and touch the engine when the hood is
closed.
Do not use gasoline as a cleaning agent or
solvent when carrying out repairs or maintenance. Saab recommends the use of environmentally safe degreasing agents.

If corrosion has already set in, e.g. as a
result of stone-chip damage, use a pointed
knife to scrape off all surface rust. If possible, the damaged area should be taken
back to the bare metal. The metal should
then be primed with two thin coats of primer
applied by brush.
After the primer has dried, apply several thin
layers of topcoat enamel until the surface of
the repaired area is flush with the surrounding paintwork.
Stir both primer and touch-up enamel thoroughly before use and allow each coat to
dry before applying the next.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 243 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Car care and technical information

Air conditioning
(ACC)

Two-coat enamel

WARNING
• All repairs and adjustments on the A/C
system must be carried out by a workshop authorized for this kind of work.
IB1334

As the name implies, two-coat enamel is
applied in two operations. The first coat, the
base color, contains the pigment, metal
flakes and binder. The second coat consists
of a clear enamel, which provides the final
gloss for the paintwork and protects the
base from moisture and environmental contaminants.
Touch-up stone-chip damage as follows:
1 Thoroughly clean the damaged area.
2 Apply the primer, base color and finally,
the enamel. To achieve the best finish,
apply two or three coats of primer.

243

Surface-treatment composition
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Body panel
Zinc (certain panel sections only) 7.5 µm
Phosphate coating
Cathodic ED 23 µm
Intermediate coat 35 µm
Metallic base 15 µm
Clear enamel /solid enamel 40 µm

• The A/C system is pressurized. Do not
break any connections or undo A/C
system components.
• Escaping refrigerant gas can cause
visual impairment or other injury.

NOTICE
• The A/C system is designed for use
with R134a refrigerant.
• Refrigerant handling requires special
equipment and special procedures for
charging and draining the system.
• Never mix R134a and R12 refrigerants.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 244 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

244

Car care and technical information

Fault diagnosis
If a fault occurs in the A/C system, there are
a number of checks you can perform yourself. If the fault persists, however, have the
system checked by a workshop. We recommend that you contact an authorized Saab
dealer.
Important!
When the A/C system is running, the intake
air is dehumidified, and the resultant condensation is drained off through two outlets
underneath the floor of the car in the vicinity
of the front doors. It is therefore perfectly
normal for water to be seen dripping from
these outlets when the car is parked. The
warmer the ambient air and the higher the
humidity, the greater will be the amount of
condensation formed.

Inadequate cooling:
a Check that the condenser (forward of
the radiator) has not become clogged
with dirt and insects.
b Make sure that the drive belt for the compressor is not slipping.
c Check the fuses for the ventilation fans
and compressor.

Maintenance
• The drive belt for the compressor should
be inspected under the regular service
program.
• Clean dirt and insects away from the condenser and radiator to prevent clogging.
When washing the car, use the hose to
spray the radiator and condenser (located
forward of the radiator) from both sides
(both from the front of the car and from
inside the engine bay). Do not use a pressure washer.
Caution: Do not use the hose when the
engine is hot.
Other than in extremely cold weather, do not
screen the radiator, e.g. with netting, as this
will greatly diminish its cooling capacity.
N ote:The A/C system will only operate
when the outdoor temperature is above the
freezing point (0°C, 32°F).

95_U S_M 07.book Page 245 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Car care and technical information

Anti-corrosion
treatment
The entire car is corrosion-protected at the
factory in different stages by an electrolytic
immersion coating and a PVC-based protective coating to protect against corrosion
caused by stones flung up by the wheels. A
thin penetrating anti-rust oil is also applied
in cavities and body members.
In addition to conventional anti-corrosion
treatment like painting, underbody treatment and cavity treatment, most of the body
panel surfaces are galvanized. These
include the hood, the doors and the underbody.
The anti-corrosion treatment on the underside of the car and inside the wheel arches
is particularly exposed to constant wear and
possible damage, the degree of which will
obviously depend on driving conditions.

245

What causes rust?

Preventive maintenance

Steel body panels of automobiles are subject to rusting whenever air and moisture
manage to penetrate the protective finish,
and body panels may rust through if the process is unchecked. Rusting can occur wherever water is trapped or where the car’s
panels are continuously damp. Damage to
paint and undercoating by stones, gravel
and minor crashes immediately exposes
metal to air and moisture. Road salts used
for de-icing will collect on the bottom of the
car and promote rusting. Areas of the country with high humidity have great potential
for rust problems, especially where salt is
used on roads or there is moist sea air.
Industrial pollution (fallout) may also
damage paint and promote rusting.

The following procedures are necessary to
help protect against rusting. Refer also to
the terms and conditions of the Sheet Metal
Coverage described in the warranty booklet.
1 Wash the car frequently, and wax at
least twice a year. Under adverse conditions, where there is a rapid buildup of
dirt, sand or road salt, wash your car at
least once a week. After extreme exposure to salted snow or slush, evidenced
by a white film on the car, wash the car
immediately. Frequent washing will prevent paint damage from acid rain and
other airborne contaminants such as
tree sap and bird droppings. If any of
these contaminants are noticed on the
car the finish should be washed immediately.
• Begin washing by rinsing the entire car
with water to loosen and flush off heavy
concentrations of dirt (include the
underbody).
• Sponge the car with a solution of either
a good quality car soap or mild general
purpose (dish washing) detergent and
water.
• Rinse car thoroughly with clean water.
• After washing, check and clear all
drains in doors and body panels.
• Wipe the car dry, preferably using a
chamois.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 246 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

246

Car care and technical information

2 Clean the underside of the car during
the winter. Use high pressure water to
clean the car’s underside (floor panels,
wheel wells) at least at mid- winter and
in the spring.
3 Inspect the car frequently for leaks or
damage, and arrange for needed
repairs promptly. After washing or after
heavy rain, check for leaks. When washing the car inspect body surfaces for
paint damage. While checking for leaks,
lift the floor mats and check beneath
them. Water can collect in these areas
and remain for prolonged periods. Dry
any wet areas including the floor mats.
Have leaks repaired as soon as possible.
Use touch-up paint to repair small
scratches or minor finish damage. Areas
where metal is exposed will rust quickly
and MUST be repaired immediately by
touch-up or professional repainting.
Rust must be removed, the bare metal
primed and painted. Major body
damage should be repaired immediately
and new panels or exposed areas
should be undercoated with anti- corrosion material.
Repairs of this type are the owner’s
responsibility and are not covered under
warranty.

4 Inspect the undercoating and touch
up if necessary. Pay particular attention to the fenders and wheel housings,
which are exposed to abrasion by flying
gravel, etc. If the composition has worn
or flaked off, the steel must be thoroughly cleaned and dried before a fresh
coat is applied. The cleaning is best
done with a scraper and a steel wire
brush, followed by washing with solvent.
Apply the new coating thinly, as otherwise it may run off or fall off when dry.

For long trips
Before setting off on a long journey, it is
advisable to have your car checked over by
your Saab dealer.
Obtain a few important items to take along
on your journey such as spare bulbs, wiper
blades, fuses, a Poly-V-belt and the like.
You can check some points yourself beforehand:
• Make sure that the engine is in good condition.
• Check that no oil or gasoline leaks out of
the engine or gearbox/transmission.
• Check the coolant and power steering
fluid levels. Check also for leaks.
• Inspect the Poly-V-belt and replace it if it
shows any signs of hard wear.
• Check the battery charge.
• Check the tires for tread pattern and air
pressure, including the compact spare
wheel.
• Check the brakes.
• Check all bulbs.
• Check for the presence of the tool kit and
the jack in the car.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 247 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Car care and technical information

Recovery and/or
recycling of automotive
materials
Information on the scrapping and recycling
of car materials is available on
www.saab.com.

Headlight aiming
WARNING
Before checking/adjusting the headlight
aiming, switch off the engine to avoid
danger of fingers and hands being injured
by moving parts.
The radiator fan can start up even when
the engine is switched off.
The vehicle has a visual optical headlight
aiming system equipped with vertical
aiming device. The aim has been preset at
the factory and should normally not need
further adjustments.
If your headlights are damaged in a crash,
the headlight aim may be affected. If you
believe your headlights need to be
re-aimed, we recommend that you take it to
your Saab dealer for service, however, it is
possible for you to re-aim your headlights as
described in the following procedure.

NOTICE
To make sure that your headlights are
aimed properly read all instructions
before beginning. Failure to follow these
instructions could cause damage to
headlight parts or a not correctly aimed
headlight.

247

To check the aim, the vehicle should be
properly prepared as follows:
• The vehicle shall be placed so that the
headlights are 25 ft (7.6 m) from a light
colored wall or other flat surface. The
aiming area should be darkened, this will
improve your ability to see the beam of the
low beam headlight being aimed.
• The vehicle must have all four wheels on
a perfectly level surface which is level all
the way to the wall or other flat surface.
• The vehicle should be placed so it is perpendicular to the wall or other flat surface.
• The vehicle should be unloaded and fuel
tank full, and one person or 160 lbs.
(75 kg) on the drivers seat.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 248 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Car care and technical information

• The vehicle should be fully assembled
and all other work stopped while headlight
aiming is being done.
• The vehicle should not have any snow,
ice or mud attached to it.
• Tires should be inflated to the prescribed
pressure.
• Close all doors.
• Rock the vehicle to stabilize the suspension.
Headlight aiming is done with the vehicle
low beam lamps. The high beam lamps will
be correctly aimed if the low beam lamps
are aimed properly.

2
4
1
2
3
4

IB1950

248

Wall or garage door
25 ft (7.6 m) between wall and headlight lens.
Measurement from the ground to the low beam aiming marker on the headlight lens.
Same measurement as (3) but substract 2 inches for vehicles with halogen lamps and
3 inches for vehicles with xenon lamps.

If you find that the headlight needs adjustment follow these steps:
1 Open the hood and locate the vertical
aiming device.
2 Locate the marker on the lens.
3 Measure the distance from the ground to
the aim marker on each lens.
Subtract 2 inches if the vehicle is
equipped with halogen lamps, record
this distance.
Subtract 3 inches if the vehicle is
equipped with xenon lamps, record this
distance.

4 At the wall or other flat surface, measure
from the ground to the recorded distance (see point 4) and draw a horizontal
line the width of the vehicle.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 249 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Car care and technical information

249

5 Turn on the low beam headlights and
place a piece of cardboard or equivalent
(although not directly on the lens) in front
of the headlight not being aimed. This
should allow the beam cut-off of the
headlight being aimed to be seen on the
flat surface.

IB1951

Do not cover a headlight directly on the
lens to improve beam cut-off when aiming. Covering a headlight may cause
excessive heat build-up which may cause
damage to the headlight.

IB1952

NOTICE

Vertical aiming device

Aiming marker on headlight lens

6 Turn the vertical aiming screw until the
horizontal cut-off of the headlight is
aligned with the horizontal line on the
wall.

Correctly adjusted low beam

IB1954

IB1953

Horizontal line on wall or other flat surface

95_U S_M 07.book Page 250 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

250

Car care and technical information

(This page has been left blank.)

95_U S_M 07.book Page 251 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Customer Assistance and Information

251

Customer Assistance and Information
Maintenance schedule _
Owner assistance _____
Reporting Safety Defects
(U.S.A.) _____________
Reporting Safety Defects
to the Canadian
government _________
Vehicle Data Collection
and Event Data
Recorders __________

3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars
(can depend on model variant, engine variant,
market specification, options or accessories).

252
253
254

254

255

95_U S_M 07.book Page 252 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

252

Customer Assistance and Information

Maintenance schedule
The Maintenance Schedule prescribes a
service program to the purchaser/operator
of a Saab that is reasonable and necessary
to ensure the proper emission control systems function, safety and reliability of the
Saab automobile in normal use. Additional
maintenance is recommended for specific
components when the car is operated under
certain severe conditions. Proper maintenance is always good advice!
Authorized Saab dealers are equipped and
trained to meet your Saab’s service needs.
They regularly receive up-to-date Saab
service manuals and parts and technical
service bulletins from Saab and are able,
through their franchise agreement, to attend
Saab service schools, obtain Saab special
tools and technical assistance and purchase original equipment service and
replacement parts.
Today’s complex automobiles should only
be entrusted to the most knowledgeable
service professionals. A Saab dealer is your
best choice.

Service intervals

Engine oil and filter changes

A time for service message will illuminate on
the Saab Instrument Display (SID) when the
car is due for regular maintenance.

Changing the engine oil and filter is required
at every service point. Use only a Saab
approved long-life oil filter and engine oils
stated in the Specification section of this
Owner’s Manual. The use of extra additives
in the oil is not necessary and is not recommended, and may be harmful to turbochargers.
More frequent oil changes are recommended if your vehicle is operated under
the following conditions:
• Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to
16 km). This is particularly important
when outside temperatures are below
freezing.
• Most trips include extensive idling (such
as frequent stop-and-go driving).
• Most trips are through dusty areas.
• You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier
on top of your vehicle.
• If the vehicle is used for delivery service,
police, taxi or other commercial applications.
If your driving habits match this description,
have the engine oil and filter changed inbetween normal services at 5,000 mile
(8,000 km) intervals. The Saab Warranty
and Service Record Booklet has provisions
to record extra oil changes.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 253 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Customer Assistance and Information
Service record retention

Service costs

It is the owner´s responsibility to retain service records. If possible, you should keep
copies of all shop work orders for all service
and repairs, whenever performed. As indicated in the new car and emission control
system warranties, it is important to document that all necessary maintenance has
been done.

Dealer pricing practices and labor for service work vary. Saab’s recommended service times for each service point do not
include the labor required to replace wear
items, such as wiper blades, brake pads or
tires. Nor is labor to perform other service or
repairs found to be necessary as a result of
the inspections included in these times.
Additional labor and parts will be charged
for such work when necessary, except as
covered under an applicable Saab warranty
or any optional extended service contract.
Transmission fluid changes or suspension
alignment, when necessary, are also additional.
Dealer charges for general shop material,
regulated hazardous waste removal, recycling expenses or other operation costs may
also be applied to service and repair
invoices and are apt to vary by dealer and
location.

HOW THE SERVICE RECORD IS
ORGANIZED
The service record is comprised of a series
of coupons on which to record services as
they are performed. There are additional
coupons for documenting extra engine oil
and filter changes, extra automatic transmission fluid services necessary for severe
service conditions, and brake fluid changes.

HOW TO USE THE SERVICE
RECORD COUPONS
When the car is brought to a Saab dealer for
scheduled maintenance, present the Saab
Warranty and Service Record Booklet to the
service manager. When the technician has
completed the service, the technician will
sign the maintenance record. The person
responsible for quality assurance at the
dealership will also sign and stamp the
record with the dealer identification stamp.

253

Owner assistance
Warranties and service problem
assistance
For complete information about all applicable warranties, including the New Car Warranty, Perforation Warranty, Vehicle Emission Warranty and Emission Perforation
Warranty, consult the Warranties and Service Record Booklet which accompanies
this Owner’s Manual. It also contains owner
assistance information including Saab
Roadside Assistance. If the booklet is lost or
misplaced, a new one may be ordered
through a Saab dealer or by contacting
Saab.
In the U.S. there is a national Customer
Assistance Center at Saab Automobile
USA, Inc. The toll-free number to call from
all 50 states is 1-800-955-9007.
In Canada, please call the Saab Customer
Assistance Center at 1-800-263-1999.
A list of authorized Saab sales and service
dealers is available for those planning to
travel in the United States and Canada.
Canadian or U.S. travelers may call the
Customer Assistance Center in the country
in which they are traveling.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 254 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

254

Customer Assistance and Information

Change of Address Notification
(U.S. and Canada)
Two change of address cards are provided
at the end of the Warranty and Service
Record Booklet. Knowing your current
address allows Saab to contact you in the
event of a recall or service campaign.
Please help us keep our records up to date
for your own peace of mind.

Service information
Factory Service Manuals for the Saab 9-5
car line can be ordered through your Saab
dealer or by visiting www.saabtechinfo.com.
These are comprehensive manuals on CD
rom, geared to use by professional technicians.
Consult your Saab dealer for prices and for
a listing for your model.

Reporting Safety
Defects (U.S.A.)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Saab Cars USA, Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds that
a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles,
it may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your
dealer, or Saab Automobile USA, Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
toll-free Vehicle Safety Hotline at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153; go
to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street,
SW., Washington D.C. 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http:// www safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety
Defects to the Canadian
government
If you live in Canada, and believe that your
vehicle has a safety defect, you should
immediately notify Transport Canada, in
addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited.
You may write to Transport Canada at
Box 8880, Ottawa, Ontario, K1G 3J2.
In addition to notifying Transport Canada
in a situation like this, we certainly hope
you will notify us. In Canada, please call
our Saab Customer Assistance Center at
1-800-263- 1999.
Or write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Assistance Center,
1908 Colonel Sam Drive,
Oshawa, Ontario, L1H 8P7.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 255 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Customer Assistance and Information
Vehicle Data Collection and
Event Data Recorders
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has a number of sophisticated computer systems that monitor and control several aspects of the vehicle’s performance.
Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle computers to monitor emission control components
to optimize fuel economy, to monitor conditions for air bag deployment and, if so
equipped, to provide anti-lock braking and
to help the driver control the vehicle in difficult driving situations. Some information
may be stored during regular operations to
facilitate repair of detected malfunctions;
other information is stored only in a crash
event by computer systems commonly
called event data recorders (EDR).
In a crash event, computer systems, such
as the Air Bag Sensing and Diagnostic
Module (SDM) in your vehicle may record
information about the condition of the vehicle and how it was operated, such as data
related to engine speed, brake application,
throttle position, vehicle speed, steering
wheel angle, lateral acceleration, safety belt
usage, air bag readiness, air bag performance, and the severity of a collision. This
information has been used to improve vehicle crash performance and may be used to
improve crash performance of future vehicles and driving safety. Unlike the data
recorders on many airplanes, these
on-board systems do not record sounds,
such as conversation of vehicle occupants.

To read this information, special equipment
is needed and access to the vehicle or the
SDM is required.
Saab will not access information about a
crash event or share it with others other than
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if
the vehicle is leased, with the consent of
the lessee,
• in response to an official request of police
or similar government office,
• as part of Saab’s defense of litigation
through the discovery process, or
• as required by law.
In addition, once Saab collects or receives
data, Saab may
• use the data for Saab research needs,
• make it available for research where
appropriate confidentiality is to be maintained and need is shown, or
• share summary data which is not tied to a
specific vehicle with non-Saab organizations for research purposes.
Others, such as law enforcement, may have
access to the special equipment that can
read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or SDM.
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®,
please check the OnStar® subscription service agreement or manual for information
on its operations and data collection.

255

95_U S_M 07.book Page 256 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

256

Customer Assistance and Information

(This page has been left blank)

95_U S_M 07.book Page 257 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Specifications

257

IB3918

Specifications

3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars
(can depend on model variant, engine variant,
market specification, options or accessories).

General______________
Engine ______________
Fuel_________________
Engine oil____________
Engine variants _______
Electrical system______
Drive belts ___________
Manual gearbox_______
Automatic transmission
Suspension __________
Steering _____________
Brake system_________
Wheels and tires ______
Plates and labels______

258
260
260
261
262
263
263
264
264
265
265
265
266
268

95_U S_M 07.book Page 258 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

258

Specifications

General
Overall length, including bumpers:
9-5 Sedan_______________________

190.4 in (4836 mm)

9-5 SportCombi __________________

190.6 in (4841 mm)

Overall width, including door mirrors ____

80.4 in (2042 mm)

Maximum height:
9-5 Sedan_______________________
9-5 SportCombi __________________

57.3 in (1454 mm)
57.7 in (1465 mm)

Wheelbase _______________________

106.4 in (2703 mm)

Ground clearance at gross vehicle weight

approx. 4.6 in
(116 mm)

Track:
Front __________________________
Rear ___________________________
Turning circle (curb to curb) ___________

59.9 in (1522 mm) *)
60.2 in (1528 mm) *)
37.1 ft (11.3 m)

Turning circle (measured at vehicle extremities) _____________________________ 39.0 ft (11.9 m)
Number of seats (incl. driver) _________

*) Specified track applies to wheel sizes:

6 x 15 & 6.5 x 16

VIN on cars sold in
USA

VIN on cars sold in Canada

Permissible load (in addition to driver) = GVW minus curb weight
The maximum permissible axle load, front or rear, must not be exceeded.
The maximum permissible axle load, front or rear, must not be exceeded.

Chassis number in engine bay
Weight ready for driving (i.e. with full fuel
tank, washer-fluid reservoir, standard tools 3430–3750 lbs.
and spare wheel) ____________________ (1555–1700 kg)
Gross vehicle weight (GVW) ___________ 4380–4680 lbs.
(1980–2125 kg)
Maximum axle load:
Front ___________________________ 2590 lbs. (1175 kg)
Rear, 9-5 Sedan ___________________ 2310 lbs. (1050 kg)
Rear, 9-5 SportCombi ______________ 2480 lbs. (1125 kg)
Weight distribution:
Curb weight, front/rear ______________ 60/40 %
GVW, front/rear ___________________ 50/50 %
Maximum roof load __________________ 220 lbs. (100 kg)
Maximum luggage compartment load§ ___ 176 lbs. (80 kg)
Maximum combined load, luggage
compartment and roof ________________ 264 lbs. (120 kg)

95_U S_M 07.book Page 259 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Specifications
Luggage compartment
Volume (SAE):
9-5 Sedan_______________________
9-5 SportCombi, rear seat upright ____
9-5 SportCombi, rear seat folded _____
Luggage compartment, length, 9-5 Sedan:
Rear seat upright _________________
Rear seat folded down _____________
Luggage compartment, length,
9-5 SportCombi:
Rear seat upright _________________
Rear seat folded __________________

259

Trailer:
15.9 cu.ft.
(450 litres)
31.4 cu. ft.
(890 litres)
73.0 cu. ft.
(2067 litres)
43.0 in (1092 mm)
67.5 in (1714 mm)

42.8 in (1087 mm)
68.2 in (1732 mm)

WARNING
• The GVW and maximum axle loads must not be exceeded.
Note that if some accessories (e.g. towbar, CD changer) are
fitted, the available load capacity is reduced by the weight of
these.
• When carrying a load in the luggage compartment, make sure
that it is tied down securely, particularly when part or all of the
rear seat is folded down.

Maximum towing speed:
Trailer with brakes _________________ 60 mph (100 km/h)
Trailer without brakes _______________ Local restrictions
apply
Maximum weight:
Trailer with brakes _________________ 3500 lbs (1588 kg)
Trailer without brakes ______________ 1000 lbs (450 kg)
Maximum load on ball hitch __________ 110–165 lbs
(50–75 kg)
The above speed and weight restrictions are those specified by
Saab Automobile AB.
Note that local restrictions may apply to trailer speeds and weights
(see page 174).

95_U S_M 07.book Page 260 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

260

Specifications

Engine
4-cylinder ________________________

Fuel
Four cylinders, twin
overhead camshafts, 16 valves
and two balancer
shafts.

Fuel-tank capacity ____________

18.0 gal. (68 litres)

For optimum performance Saab
recommends:_________________

• AON 93*

Cylinder bores _____________________

3.54 in (90 mm)

* If AON 90 is used some decrease in engine power can occur.

Stroke ___________________________

3.54 in (90 mm)

Swept volume _____________________

139.7 cu.in
(2.290 litres)

Idling speed _______________________

825 rpm (man.)
860 rpm (aut.)

Gasoline with a lower octane rating can be used, although not
lower than AON 87. However, engine performance will fall slightly
and heavy loading and laboring should be avoided. For optimum
performance, use the recommended grade of fuel.
For further information on fuel, see page 148.

Antifreeze_________________________

Saab-approved
antifreeze

Coolant capacity ___________________

7.8 qts (7.4 litres)

95_U S_M 07.book Page 261 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Specifications
Engine oil
To meet demands in Saab's extended service intervals all
engines are filled with specially designed synthetic factory fill
oils. Long service intervals, fuel economy and environmental
issues are the base for our choice of oil. By using oils approved
by Saab you minimise the tendencies for oil sludge build, by that
protecting the engine from harmful, wear increasing, deposits.

Approved engine oils:
All gasoline engines - Fully synthetic engine oil - approved
against the GM-LL-A025 specification - with viscosity
SAE 0W-30 or SAE 0W-40.
Oil used at, or in-between, service must be approved against the
engine´s specified classification to render possible the usage of
Saab Automobile AB specified service intervals.
For optimum performance Saab recommends the use of Saab
Long Life Turbo Oil 0W-30 or Mobil 1 0W-40 European Car formula, but other oils approved against the above specification
and with proper SAE viscosity 0W-30 or 0W-40 may also be
used.

Servicing/Oil changes:
To be able to use recommended service intervals the need to
use only approved engine oils is vital. Use only engine oils
approved for your engine. Service should be done according
to the recommended service intervals to optimize your engine's
function through out its entire life. Saab Automobile AB will not
take responsibility for any damage that might occur due to
neglecting to meet above mentioned requirements.

261

At your Saab dealers you can find Saab Genuine or Mobil
engine oils. Among those there are oils specially designed to
meet your engines specific needs. We recommend that you,
with the help of our skilled service personnel, choose your oil
from that assortment.
Other oil companies also offer engine oils approved against GM
specifications. Oils meeting these standards may be marketed
as synthetic. However, not all synthetic engine oils will meet your
engine´s specific requirements. Please ensure only to use oils
approved against your engine´s specific requirements, i.e.
GM-LL-A025 with viscosity SAE 0W-30 or 0W-40.

Recommended oil viscosity
Viscosity is a measurement of the oil´s thickness at various temperatures, according to the SAE standard. This thickness influences e.g. fuel economy and cold starting properties. For
optimum performance Saab recommends:
For gasoline engines:
SAE 0W-30
or
SAE 0W-40 engine oil

Extra engine oil additives
Don't add anything to your oil. The recommended oils are all you
will need for good engine performance and protection.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 262 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

262

Specifications
Engine variants

When to change engine oil
Your vehicle will display when it is time for servicing on the SID,
based on the mileage and time since the last service.
For this service system to work it is of outmost importance that
the right engine oil is used.
When the message for service is displayed you need to have the
required service done as soon as possible.
After the service your service personnel will reset the service
indicator. It is important to reset the service indicator in order to
optimize the time to the next service.

2.3T Ecopower
Rating, EEC at 5500 rpm ____________ 220 hp (162 kW)
Maximum torque, EEC at 1800-4500 rpm 228.6 ft.lb
(310 Nm)
Compression ratio _________________ 9.3:1

2.3 Turbo Ecopower
Rating, EEC at 5000 rpm ____________ 260 hp (191 kW)

Oil capacity incl. filter (on changing) ____

4.1 qts (4.0 litres)

Maximum torque, EEC at 1900 rpm ____ 258.0 ft.lb.
(350 Nm)
Compression ratio _________________ 9.3:1

95_U S_M 07.book Page 263 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Specifications
Electrical system

Drive belts

Voltage __________________________

12 V

Engine variants

Battery capacity ___________________

70 Ah

Starter motor ______________________

1.4 kW

Drive belt _________________________ 95.08 in
(2415 mm)

Outside length

Alternator rating ____________________

140 A/14 V

Firing order _______________________

1–3–4–2

2.3 Turbo _______________________

NGK
PFR 6H-10

2.3T and 2.3 Turbo ________________

NGK
PFR 6H-10

Electrode gap ____________________

0.0374 in (0.95 mm)
IB929

Spark plugs:

Drive belt

263

95_U S_M 07.book Page 264 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

264

Specifications

Manual gearbox

Automatic transmission

Type ____________________________

All-synchromesh
5-speed with final
drive and differential

Oil ______________________________

Saab MTF 0063

Oil capacity _______________________

1.9 qts (1.8 litres)

Oil volume (on changing) ____________

1.6 qts (1.5 litres)

Clutch type _______________________

Hydraulic, single
dry-plate clutch of
diaphragm-spring
type

Speed (mph / km/h) at 1000 rpm in 5th gear: 27–29 / 43–47

Type _____________________________ Electronically controlled 5-speed,
fully automatic with
hydraulic torque
converter, planetary gear set and
integral final drive
Lock-up function in
selector positions 3,
4 and 5.
Selector-lever positions ______________ P R N D M L
Clutch type ________________________ Hydraulic plate
clutches, brake
bands and one-way
couplings
Speed (mph / km/h) at 1000 rpm in 5th gear: 29–30 / 46–48

95_U S_M 07.book Page 265 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Specifications
Suspension

265

Brake system

Front __________________________

Gas-filled

Footbrake (ABS) ____________________ Hydraulic, dualcircuit brake system. Diagonally
split circuit with vacuum servo unit.
Disc brakes front
and rear. EBD, see
page 160.

Rear ___________________________

Oil and gas filled

Parkingbrake _______________________ Acts on rear wheels

Spring type, front and rear ___________

Coil springs

Maximum deflection of springs:
Front __________________________

7.09 in (180 mm)

Rear ___________________________

7.87 in (200 mm)

Dampers:

Brake fluid _________________________ DOT 4

Steering
Steering _________________________

Brake-fluid capacity _________________ 0.951 qts (900 ml)
Power-assisted
steering of
rack-and-pinion
type; telescopic
steering-column
shaft with universal
joints

Number of turns, lock to lock __________

2.9

Power-steering fluid ________________

Power-steering fluid
CHF 11S or
CHF 202

Disc diameter:
Front, ventilated ___________________ 12.05 in (308 mm)
Rear, solid _______________________ 11.26 in (286 mm)
Total friction area of brake pads:
Front ___________________________ 36.3 in2 (234 cm2)
Rear ___________________________ 15.5 in2 (100 cm2)

95_U S_M 07.book Page 266 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

266

Specifications

Wheels and tires

Full size spare wheel:

(recommended dimensions)

Wheel___________________________ 6.5 x 16”
2.3 Turbo

All season tires

Tire_____________________________ 215/55 R16
Pressure_________________________ 42 psi (290 kPa)

215/55 R16 93 H

235/45 R17 94 V

Maximum life _____________________ 2,200 miles
(3500 km)
Maximum speed __________________ 50 mph (80 km/h)

Winter tires
215/55 R16 93 Q

225/45 R17 94 Q XL/RF

235/45 R17 94 Q

Wheel sizes
6.5 x 16”

7 x 17”

7.5 x 17”

Speed ratings and load indexes, see page 230.
Before changing to wheels/tyres of another size, we recommend that you
contact an authorized Saab workshop regarding acceptable options.

Compact spare:

NOTICE
Snow chains:
Snow chains must not be fitted to the rear wheels, and may only
be used with the following wheel-tire combinations:
Wheels
Tires
6.5 x 16”_______ 215/55 R16
Snow chains must not be fitted to 17" wheels.
Max. permissible speed with snow chains fitted is 30 mph
(50 km/h).
Contact an authorized Saab dealer for advice on snow chains.

NOTICE

Wheel __________________________

4 x 16”

Tire ____________________________

T115/70 R16

Wheels larger than 17” must not be fitted.

Pressure ________________________

60 psi (420 kPa)

Wheel offset must be 49 mm.

Maximum life ____________________

2,200 miles
(3500 km)

Maximum speed _________________

50 mph (80 km/h)

95_U S_M 07.book Page 267 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Specifications

267

Lowest recommended tire pressure, cold tires
Tire size
All season tires
215/55 R16 93 H

235/45 R17 94 V

Load/speed
mph (km/h) 1)

Front
kPa/psi

Rear
kPa/psi

1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160)
4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160)
1–5 pers./100– (160–)
1–3 pers./0–120 (0–190)
4–5 pers./0–120 (0–190)
1–5 pers./120– (190–)

250/36
250/36
290/42
240/35
240/35
280/41

230/33
230/33
270/39
240/35
240/35
280/41

Tire size
Winter tires
215/55 R16 93 Q
225/45 R17 94 Q
XL/RF
235/45 R17 94 Q
Compact spare
T115/70 R16
Spare wheel
215/55 R16 93 H
Spare wheel

Load/speed
mph (km/h) 1)

Front
kPa/psi

Rear
kPa/psi

1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160)
4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160)
1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160)
4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160)
1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160)
4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160)

240/35
260/38
250/36
270/39
240/35
260/38

Max 50 (80)

420/60

Max 50 (80)

290/42

1) Do not exceed posted speed limits.
By cold tires is meant tires that are the same temperature as the surrounding air temperature.
The values for tire pressure in the table above are for tires at 68°F (20°C).
The tire pressure will increase as the tires become warm (e.g. during
motorway driving), and decrease as they cool.
When the temperature of the tires increase or decrease by 10 degrees the
tire pressure will correspondingly increase or decrease by 10 kPa/2 psi
(0.1 bar).

95_U S_M 07.book Page 268 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

268

Specifications

Plates and labels

5
3

IB4528

When consulting your Saab dealer, it may be
necessary to quote the car’s V.I.N., engine
and gearbox numbers.
1 V.I.N. number, inside windshield.
2 V.I.N. label and certification label.
3 Gearbox number.
4 Engine number.
5 Canada: Label for tire pressure and color
codes (trim and body).
USA: color codes (trim and body) can be
found on the V.I.N. label on the B-pillar.
6 Chassis number, stamped on body.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 269 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Specifications
position: 1
|
V.I.N.:
Y

|
1

|
2

|
3

|
4

|
5

2
|
S

3
|
3

4
|
E

5
|
H

6
|
4

7
|
9

8
|
G

9
|
6

10 11
12
|
|
|
7 3 045842

|
6 = identification codes for certain chassis details

1 Region ___________

Y = Northern Europe

8 Engine variant _____ G =

2.3Turbo

2 Country __________

S = Sweden

3 Manufacturer _____

3 = Saab Automobile AB

8 Engine variant _____ A =
G=

2.3T
2.3 Turbo

4 Product line ______

E = 9-5

5 Model series ______

D = 9-5 Arc with driver’s and
passenger-side airbags

10 Model year ________ 7 =

2007

11 Factory ___________ 3 =

Trollhättan

H = 9-5 Aero with driver’s and
passenger-side airbags

12 Serial number ______

000001–999999

6 Body version _____

4 = 4-door
5 = 5-door

7 Gearbox __________

5 = Manual 5-speed
9 = Automatic 5-speed

9 Check digit ________ 0–9/X

269

95_U S_M 07.book Page 270 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

270

Specifications

Several of the systems in your
Saab car can be adjusted to
better fit your individual needs
Some functions are governed by legal
requirements and cannot therefore be
reprogrammed.
We recommend that you contact an authorized Saab dealer for further information.
Car alarm/central locking system:
• The number of blinks when locking/
unlocking.
• Automatic locking of the trunk when the
car (SportCombi) is driven, 1 to 8 mph
(2–14 km/h), YES or NO.
• Preclude the unlocking of the trunk while
the car (SportCombi) is driven, YES or
NO.
• Automatic locking of the trunk (SportCombi) after 1 second–4 minutes if it has
not been opened, YES or NO.
• Automatic locking of the trunk (SportCombi) when it is closed, YES or NO.
• Automatic locking of all doors when the
car is driven above 7.5 mph (12 km/h),
YES or NO.

Saab Information Display:
• Outdoor temperature display can be
adjusted.
Miscellaneous:
• Select the on-time for heated rear seat 3.
• Additional sweep of the wipers after windshield washer function (ON or OFF).
• Courtesy Headlight Feature on-time can
vary from 20 to 50 seconds.
• Night panel illumination deactivation
speed for the speedometer can be
adjusted.

Following adjustments can be
done by the driver:
Automatic Climate Control (ACC):
You can choose whether front seat and rear
window heating is to be activated manually
or automatically; see "Adaptation of ACC"
on page 85.
Saab 9-5 Audio System (see page 106):
• Speed dependent volume.
Daytime Running Lights:
To disable, turn off the ignition and pull out
fuse 35, see page 219.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 271 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Index

Index
A
A/C system, fault diagnosis _______ 244
A/C system, maintenance _________ 243
ABS brakes ____________________ 160
ACC __________________________ 79
ACC functions ___________________ 82
ACC, automatic climate control _____ 79
ACC, calibration _________________ 86
ACC, condensation water __________ 86
ACC, useful tips _________________ 86
AUX input _____________________ 104
Adjusting the steering wheel _______ 114
Adjustment, seats ________________ 18
Air conditioning (A/C), fault diagnosis
and maintenance ______________ 243
Airbag _________________________ 29
Alarm _________________________ 50
Alarm functions __________________ 53
Alarm signals ________________ 50, 53
Album information _______________ 104
Alternator _____________________ 201
Alternator drive belt __________ 201, 263
Alternator rating ________________ 263
Antennas ______________________ 109
Anticorrosion treatment ___________ 245
Antidazzle rear-view mirror ________ 121
Anti-skid ______________________ 163
Autochecking of lights on starting ____ 64

Auto-dimming rear-view mirror with
garage door opener ____________ 118
Automatic climate control (ACC) _____ 79
Automatic transmission, technical
data _________________________ 264
Aviod theft, tip __________________ 166

B
Battery ________________________ 199
Battery charging/replacing ________ 200
Battery, boost starting ____________ 186
Before a long journey ____________ 246
Before towing a camper or trailer ___ 177
Belt guide ______________________ 12
Boost starting using jump leads ____ 186
Brake and clutch fluid ____________ 196
Brake-fluid reservoir _____________ 196
Brakes, technical data ____________ 265
Bulbs, changing ________________ 204
Bulbs, table of __________________ 215
Buying new tires ________________ 225

C
CD changer ____________________ 100
CHECK messages _______________ 71
CHECKING _____________________ 71
Car alarm ______________________ 50
Car care ______________________ 189
Cargo net, 9-5 SportCombi ________ 137

271

Carpeting, care of _______________ 240
Catalytic converter, important
considerations _________________ 145
Central locking ___________________ 44
Change language in SID ___________ 72
Change of address notification _____ 254
Changing a wheel _______________ 236
Changing bulbs _________________ 204
Changing wiper blades ___________ 202
Charge mobile phone ____________ 126
Charger/Jump starting ____________ 188
Charging the battery/Jump starting __ 188
Chassis number ________________ 268
Chassis number, key to ___________ 269
Checks before towing a camper or
trailer ________________________ 177
Child safety _____________________ 22
Child safety locks, rear doors _______ 47
Cleaning, engine bay _____________ 242
Clock _________________________ 105
Color code, body ________________ 268
Color code, trim _________________ 268
Compact spare wheel ____________ 234
Compass ______________________ 122
Condensation water, ACC __________ 86
Connecting a portable player ______ 104
Coolant _______________________ 195
Courtesy Headlight Feature ________ 74
Crash memory, see EDR _________ 255
Cross modulation _______________ 110
Cruise control __________________ 159
Cup holder _____________________ 128

95_U S_M 07.book Page 272 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

272

Index

D
DICE/TWICE ___________________ 217
Dampers ______________________ 265
Date _________________________ 105
Date code, tires _________________ 234
Date display ___________________ 105
Definitions and terminology, tire ____ 231
Determining correct load, tires _____ 233
Dim-dipped beam ________________ 73
Direction indicators _______________ 75
Diversity antenna _______________ 109
Door handles ___________________ 44
Door mirrors ___________________ 116
Doors, locks & luggage compartment _ 43
Drive belt ______________________ 263
Drive belt, alternator _____________ 201
Drive belts, length _______________ 263
Driver’s seat, programmable ________ 20
Driving at night _________________ 181
Driving in hot weather ____________ 173
Driving with a load ______________ 181

E
EDR (Event Data Recorders) ______ 255
ESP® _________________________ 163
Electric heating of rear seat ________ 87
Electric windows ________________ 115
Electrical system, technical data ____ 263
Electronic Stability Program _______ 163
Electronic starting interlock _________ 49

Emergency operation of moonroof __ 124
Emission control systems _________ 192
Engine bay ____________________ 191
Engine bay, cleaning _____________ 242
Engine number _________________ 268
Engine oil, grade ________________ 261
Engine, description ______________ 194
Engine, technical data ____________ 260
Engine, temperature gauge ________ 65
Engine-oil level, checking _________ 194
Error codes, Audio System ________ 112
Event Data Recorders (EDR) ______ 255
Expansion tank, coolant __________ 195

Fuel information _________________ 148
Fuse box under hood ____________ 220
Fuse panel _____________________ 216
Fuses _________________________ 216

Garage door opener _____________ 118
Gearbox number ________________ 268
Gearbox oil, checking ____________ 195
Gearbox, technical data, __________ 264
General functions _______________ 105
Glove compartment ______________ 126

Filling a portable fuel container _____ 148
Flat spots, tires _________________ 224
Fluid level, automatic transmission __ 195
Folding the parcel shelf,
9-5 SportCombi ________________ 133
Folding the rear seat, 9-5 Sedan ___ 129
Folding the rear seat, 9-5 SportCombi 132
Frequency band _________________ 93
Frequently asked questions on airbag 40
Front fog lights __________________ 76
Frost warning ___________________ 68
Fuel __________________________ 146
Fuel consumption ________________ 68
Fuel container __________________ 148
Fuel gauge _____________________ 65
Fuel grade _____________________ 260

Handbrake _____________________ 165
Hazard warning lights _____________ 76
Head restraint ___________________ 21
Headlight flasher _________________ 73
Headlights ______________________ 73
Heated front seats ________________ 87
Hood _________________________ 190
Horn __________________________ 114

I
If a tire goes flat _________________ 228
Ignition switch __________________ 140
Immobilizer _____________________ 49
Indicator and warning lights _________ 58

95_U S_M 07.book Page 273 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Index
Indicator lights ___________________ 58
Information about fuel ____________ 148
Instrument illumination ____________ 75
Instruments and controls __________ 57
Interior equipment _______________ 113
Interior lighting _________________ 124
Interior rearview mirror ___________ 116

J
Jack _________________________ 237

K
Key ___________________________ 44
Key to chassis number ___________ 269
Key, remove ___________________ 140

L
LATCH (child safety) ______________ 23
Labeling, tire sidewall ____________ 229
Labels __________________________ 7
Leather upholstery, care of ________ 240
Light horn ______________________ 73
Light switches ___________________ 73
Loading MP3 discs ______________ 102
Loading your vehicle _____________ 231
Luggage-compartment lighting _____ 125

273

MP3 player ____________________ 102
Main instrument panel _____________ 58
Main/dipped beam _______________ 73
Maintenance schedule ___________ 252
Maintenance, A/C-system _________ 243
Manual gearbox, technical data ____ 264
Maxi fuses _____________________ 217
Milometer ______________________ 64
Moonroof ______________________ 123
Motoring abroad ________________ 246
Multipath propagation ____________ 109

Paintwork, touching-in ____________ 242
Parcel shelf, folding ______________ 133
Parking Assistance ______________ 168
Parking lights ____________________ 73
Plates and labels ________________ 268
Poly-V-belt _____________________ 201
Portable fuel container ___________ 148
Portable player _________________ 104
Power outlet ___________________ 126
Power steering _________________ 198
Power-steering fluid ______________ 198
Pressure gauge __________________ 66
Prestige _______________________ 107
Programme type ALARM __________ 99

NIGHT _________________________ 72
New tires, buying _______________ 225
Night Panel _____________________ 72

O
Odometer ______________________ 64
Oil capacity, engine ______________ 260
Oil specification _________________ 260
Outdoor temperature ______________ 68
Owner assistance _______________ 253

Quality grading, tires _____________ 226
Questions on function of airbag ______ 40

R
RDS time ______________________ 106
Radiator fan ____________________ 201
Radio __________________________ 93
Radio Data System (RDS) _________ 94
Radio text ______________________ 94
Radio waves ___________________ 110
Rain sensor _____________________ 77

95_U S_M 07.book Page 274 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

274

Index

Random playback of MP3 files, CD _ 103
Random playback, CD ____________ 99
Random playback, CD changer ____ 101
Rapid playing an MP3 file _________ 103
Rear fog light ___________________ 74
Rear seat, 9-5 Sedan, folding ______ 129
Rear seat, 9-5 SportCombi, folding _ 132
Rear window heating _____________ 82
Rear-seat head restraints __________ 21
Rear-view mirror, auto-dimming ____ 121
Rearview mirrors ________________ 116
Reclamation ___________________ 247
Recommendations for cars with
automatic transmission, towing a
camper or trailer _______________ 175
Refuelling _____________________ 146
Relay panel ____________________ 219
Remote control __________________ 44
Remote-control battery, changing ____ 49
Remove the key ________________ 140
Removing CDs __________________ 99
Removing CDs, CD-changer ______ 100
Removing MP3 discs ____________ 102
Replacement, wheel _____________ 227
Reporting safety defects __________ 254
Reprogramming of systems _______ 270
Reservoir, power-steering fluid _____ 198
Rev counter ____________________ 64
Reversing lights _________________ 76
Rolling advertisements ____________ 94
Roof load _____________________ 179
Running-in ____________________ 170

S
SDM _________________________ 255
SID ___________________________ 68
Saab Information Display (SID) _____ 68
Saab Parking Assistance _________ 168
Safety belts _____________________ 12
Safety belts, care of _____________ 239
Safety-belt pretensioners __________ 15
Safety-belt reminder ______________ 12
Seats __________________________ 18
Securing a load __________________ 47
Selecting a radio station ___________ 93
Selecting and changing tracks, CD ___ 99
Selecting/changing MP3 file _______ 103
Selector lever indication, automatic
transmission ___________________ 67
Sentronic, manual mode __________ 156
Service costs ___________________ 253
Service information ______________ 254
Service intervals ________________ 252
Service record retention __________ 253
Setting the clock ________________ 105
Setting the date _________________ 105
Settings, seats __________________ 18
Shadow effect __________________ 110
Side airbags ____________________ 36
Signalling, horn _________________ 114
Snow chains ___________________ 172
Sorting music __________________ 103
Sound system __________________ 107
Sources of AM interference _______ 111

Sources of FM interference ________ 111
Spare wheel ___________________ 234
Spare wheel and tools ____________ 183
Spark plugs ____________________ 263
Speed dependent volume
compensation _________________ 106
Speedometer _________________64, 65
Starting in cold weather, ACC _______ 84
Starting in hot weather, ACC ________ 84
Steering wheel adjustment ________ 114
Steering wheel controls ____________ 91
Steering, technical data ___________ 265
Steps for determining correct load
limit _________________________ 233
Stone-chip damage, repairing ______ 242
Storage compartments ___________ 126
Storing radio stations ______________ 93
Sun visors _____________________ 125
Suspension ____________________ 265
Suspension, technical data ________ 265
Switches _______________________ 73
Symboler ________________________ 9
Systems, adjustment _____________ 270

T
TCS OFF _______________________ 63
TP ____________________________ 99
Table of fuses __________________ 218
Tachometer _____________________ 64
Tailgate, opening _________________ 47
Tank gauge _____________________ 65

95_U S_M 07.book Page 275 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Index
Technical data _________________ 257
Technical data, radio/audio ________ 108
Temperature control, ACC _________ 81
Temperature gauge, engine ________ 65
Temperature zones, ACC __________ 81
Textile carpeting ________________ 240
Through-load hatch ______________ 131
Tie Downs _____________________ 131
Tightening torque, wheel studs _____ 236
Time display ___________________ 105
Tip, driving at night ______________ 181
Tip, to avoid theft _______________ 166
Tips, ACC ______________________ 86
Tire chains ____________________ 228
Tire date code __________________ 234
Tire inspection and rotation _______ 223
Tire markings __________________ 230
Tire pressure ___________________ 182
Tire sidewall labeling ____________ 229
Tire terminology and definitions ____ 231
Tire, compact spare _____________ 234
Tires _____________________ 222, 266
Tires, winter ___________________ 266
Tools _________________________ 183
Touching-in the paintwork _________ 242
Towbar attachment ______________ 174
Towbar load ___________________ 178
Towing the car _________________ 183
Towing, automatics ______________ 183
Traffic programme _______________ 99
Trailer weights _________________ 259
Treadwear indicators ____________ 224

Trionic ________________________ 192
Trip computer ___________________ 68
Trip meter ______________________ 64
Trunk _________________________ 129
Trunk lid, opening ________________ 47
Tuning _________________________ 93
Turbo gauge ____________________ 66
Turbo, points to note _____________ 144

U
Under the hood _________________
Uniform tire quality grading ________
Upholstery and trim ______________
Upholstery and trim, care of _______

191
226
240
240

V
Vanity mirrors __________________ 125
Vehicle Data Collection ___________ 255
Ventilated front seats _____________ 87
Viscosity, engine oil _____________ 260

W
Warning labels ___________________ 7
Warning light, AIR BAG ___________ 37
Warning lights ___________________ 58
Washers ______________________ 202
Washers, windshield _____________ 203
Washing the car ________________ 241

275

Waxing and polishing ____________ 242
Wear indicators, tires _____________ 224
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates? ______________________ 38
Wheel replacement ______________ 227
Wheel, change _________________ 236
Wheels and tires ________________ 266
Wheels and tires, sizes ___________ 266
When it is time for new tires _______ 224
Windshield washers ______________ 77
Windshield wipers ________________ 77
Winter tires ________________233, 266
Wiper blades, replacing ___________ 202
Wipers and washers __________77, 202

X
Xenon headlight ________________ 204

95_U S_M 07.book Page 276 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

276

Index

95_U S_M 07.book Page 277 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Notes

277

95_U S_M 07.book Page 278 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

278

Notes

95_U S_M 07.book Page 279 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Notes

279

95_U S_M 07.book Page 280 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

280

Notes

95_U S_M 07.book Page 281 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Notes

281

95_U S_M 07.book Page 282 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

282

Notes

95_U S_M 07.book Page 283 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Notes

283

95_U S_M 07.book Page 284 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

284

Notes

95_U S_M 07.book Page 285 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Notes

285

95_U S_M 07.book Page 286 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

286

Notes

95_U S_M 07.book Page 287 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

Notes

287

95_U S_M 07.book Page 288 Friday,June 9,2006 8:58 A M

288

Notes

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.5
Linearized                      : Yes
Page Count                      : 288
XMP Toolkit                     : XMP toolkit 2.9.1-13, framework 1.6
About                           : uuid:54b32113-a022-4a33-be2c-002d77c9bb09
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 7.0.5 (Windows)
Creator Tool                    : PScript5.dll Version 5.2.2
Modify Date                     : 2006:06:19 09:02:07-04:00
Create Date                     : 2006:06:09 09:02:22+02:00
Metadata Date                   : 2006:06:19 09:02:07-04:00
Document ID                     : uuid:52765580-935e-44c4-856c-c00a40b9ac14
Instance ID                     : uuid:ce476398-5c62-4905-b451-7726fd77d5f8
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : 95_US_M07.book
Creator                         : PScript5.dll Version 5.2.2

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Saab 2007 9 5 Owners Manual 95_US_M07

Saab-Saab-9-5-2007-Users-Manual-388171 saab-saab-9-5-2007-users-manual-388171

2007 to the manual 3f1e7f0c-e05c-4f58-8ab8-c8b0a13aa1e6

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation